JP2019213985A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can suppress a difference in game result between a player who visually recognizes main control display means and plays a game and a player who does not visually recognize the main control display means.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 includes: main control means performing a win/lose lottery and generating a special game state on the basis of a result of the win/lose lottery; sub control means capable of performing control on the basis of a signal from the main control means; main control display means which is directly controlled by the main control means and performs defined display for indicating a result of the win/lose lottery; and sub control display means which is controlled directly or indirectly by the sub control means and performs pseudo display whose start and completion timing is synchronized with the defined display of the main control display means. The sub control display means is provided with a display part which is arranged adjacent to the main control display means and is similar to a display part for performing defined display of the main control display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as that a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball-in means provided on the game board or not to generate a hit state. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, in many cases, there is provided an effect display means which is performed following the variable display performed by the main display means and performs a variable display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, see Patent Document 1). In the effect display means, even at the timing when the result of the lottery is taught by the main display means, the teaching of the result of the lottery may be postponed only by roughly suggesting the result of the lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the production, add inflections and the like by the game, and improve the production performance and the game performance.

JP 2006-271480 A

  By the way, in some cases, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by knowing the result of the lottery first. In this case, a game in which the player is grasping the display mode of the main display means and playing the game while visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, enjoying an effect in the effect display means (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired). There is a concern that it will be attached.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game between a player who visually recognizes a main display means and a player who does not visually recognize a main display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a difference in gaming results.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
Main control means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the winning / rejecting lottery;
A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
A main display unit that is directly controlled by the main control unit and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the winning / wrong lottery;
Direction display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and teaches the result of the success / failure lottery, or effect display for indicating is performed,
Irradiating means for irradiating light to the main display means.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a spinning-type gaming machine.

  According to the first aspect, it is possible to suppress a difference in a game result between a player who visually recognizes the main control display means and plays a game and a player who does not visually recognize the main control display means.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing composition of an inner frame, a game board, etc. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process performed by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows determination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variable winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a general figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of various counters used for determination of a decoration design etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows a hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows a suspension process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub display apparatus setting process. FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view of a composite display device unit. It is a front schematic diagram of a composite display apparatus unit. FIG. 41 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the composite display device unit (a cross-sectional view along the line AA in FIG. 40). FIG. 3 is a schematic sectional view for explaining a shutter structure. It is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a main display device, a sub display device, and a mounting panel. It is a front view of a main display and a sub display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop aspect of a special display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation aspect of a special display device. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite display apparatus unit in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite display apparatus unit in another embodiment. It is a cross section of a compound display unit in another embodiment. It is a cross section of a compound display unit in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side of the outer frame 11 has an inner frame as a game board mounting frame. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, a game member (a nail, an accessory, or the like) provided on the game board 30 and a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame forming portion 11a and a lower side frame forming portion 11b formed of a wooden plate, and a left side frame forming portion 11c and a right side frame forming portion 11d are formed of an aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame forming portion 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, the right side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding inward of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction. The extension wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking members of the locking device 600 are locked are provided on the front side of the extension wall portion 83. The lower receiving portion 85 is provided with a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later, protruding toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is formed integrally with the back part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. The front frame set 14, like the inner frame 12, can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set vertically along the left side as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be configured so as to be directly releasably supported by the outer frame 11, not through the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape similar to the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside via the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided at the lower center thereof. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball release lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball firing handle (hereinafter, referred to as "handle 18") protruding toward the near side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60 as a firing means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. The handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In a state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, the firing of the game ball by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. For this reason, it is possible to perform the turning operation of the handle 18 while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a firing device 60 described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via a lower plate communication path 71 and a discharge port 16 described later.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate 19, a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided. Thereby, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. The rental ball is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, that is, a cash machine.

  Further, a ball pullout button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball release button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. In other words, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball pullout button 123.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 having a built-in LED are provided, and by pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative symbol display device 42 and the like described later are provided. , A corresponding effect is performed, or the effect content is changed.

  Further, on the front surface of the front frame set 14, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface set. These light-emitting means change the light-emitting mode according to a change in the game state and the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window 101, there is provided an annular illuminated portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED. Further, on both sides of the ring-shaped illumination unit 102, an error display lamp 104 which is turned on when a predetermined error occurs is provided. In addition, a large number of fine through holes are formed above the error display lamps 104 in the annular illumination part 102 in correspondence with the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14. .

  On the back side of the front frame set 14, a glass unit 137 is attached. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are separately attached in a front-to-back pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 at the rear side of the window hole 39 so as to be in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Accordingly, a substantially central portion of the front of the game board 30 is exposed to the front of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached. I have. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device for guiding game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to a launching position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general prize device 31, a first variable prize device 32a, a second variable prize device 32b, a first start prize device 33a, a second start prize device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, A display unit 40 and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various prize devices such as the general prize device 31, the variable prize devices 32a and 32b, and the start prize devices 33a and 33b, a detection switch provided corresponding to the various prize devices. , A predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (the lower plate 15 when the upper plate 19 is full) (award balls are given).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball has entered the general prize device 31, when the ball has been entered into the first variable prize device 32 a, the number of balls entered into the second variable prize device 32 b. Thirteen game balls when there is a ball, two when there is a ball in the first start winning device 33a, and one when there is a ball in the second start winning device 33b. Is configured to be paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 which does not enter the ball just by passing the game ball (not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the payout of the game ball is not performed.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost portion of the game area, and game balls that have not won a prize in various prize apparatuses such as the general prize apparatus 31 are provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area through. In addition, a large number of nails are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  The variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

  A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47 to be a decorative pattern. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided to the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153 and falls down from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends back and forth at the center of the stage 153 to play the game ball. It may fall into the guide groove 154 that guides forward.

  Below the variable display device unit 35, a first start winning device 33a is provided. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and has a winning opening above the game board 30 through which game balls can always be won. In particular, a game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease with which game balls enter the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is disposed below the first starting winning device 33a. Normally, the first variable winning device 32a is in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is in an open state in which game balls can be won in a jackpot state or the like of a corresponding type. Although not shown, the first variable prize winning device 32a is provided with a special winning opening that opens to the rear of the game board 30, a special winning shutter that opens and closes the special winning opening, and a special winning prize for operating the special winning shutter. The first variable prize device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball that has entered a special winning opening, by driving and controlling the special winning opening solenoid and opening and closing a special winning shutter. 32a (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  Hereinafter, for convenience, in the “gaming area”, an area located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “left area”, and an area located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “right area”. That.

  At the lower part of the left side area, a general winning device 31 is provided along the periphery of the game area (the inner rail constituting portion 51). The general winning device 31 protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and has a winning opening at the upper side of which a game ball can always win.

  A through gate 34 is arranged in the right region. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  Further, a second starting winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right region. The second start winning device 33b includes a pair of blade members 37 that are rotatable and displaceable adjacent to left and right sides of a winning opening (start winning opening) of the second starting winning device 33b in which a game ball can enter. I have.

  In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery for determining whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the ordinary symbol display device 41 described later in detail. A variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery is performed. Then, when the ball is won by the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, a game nail is disposed immediately above the start winning port of the second start winning device 33b, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, the game is not performed. There is no room for the game ball to pass between the nail and the blade member 37, and the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state where the game ball cannot enter the starting winning port. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the start winning opening.

  Further, a second variable winning device 32b is provided downstream of the second starting winning device 33b. Normally, the second variable winning device 32b is in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is in an open state in which game balls can be won when a corresponding type of jackpot is present. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b is provided with a special winning opening communicating with the rear of the gaming board 30, a special winning shutter for opening and closing the special winning opening, and a special winning prize for operating the special winning shutter. A second variable prize device which includes a mouth solenoid and a second count switch 223b for detecting a game ball having entered a special winning opening, and drives and controls the special winning opening solenoid to open and close the special winning shutter. 32b (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  The large winning shutters of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment are rotatably supported at the lower edge of the large winning shutter along the lower edge of the large winning opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the special winning shutter extends up and down to close the special winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the special winning shutter. On the other hand, when the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are in the open state, the special winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is slightly inclined downward toward the rear), and the special winning opening is closed. The game ball that has flowed forward is received on the back (upper surface) of the special winning shutter and guided to the special winning opening.

  In addition, an assist winning port 48 through which game balls moving in the game area can enter is provided directly above the second start winning apparatus 33b of the present embodiment. When a game ball is detected by the assist winning detection switch 227 for detecting the game ball that has entered the assist winning port 48, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15.

  As will be described later in detail, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b respectively include a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch as condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball. 224b is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, a win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a special display device described in detail later. The variable display is performed by 43a and 43b (and the decorative symbol display device 42). Then, when the winning is determined by the winning or losing lottery, the variable display is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b (and the decorative symbol display device 42) in a manner corresponding to the winning, and the first variable winning device 32a is selected. Or, a big hit state or the like in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there is a “low-probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the win / fail lottery, and a “high-probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low-probability state in the win / loss lottery. Further, the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is relatively frequently opened (open position), and a "high ball entering state" in which a game ball can easily enter the second starting winning device 33b; There is a "low ball entry state" in which the blade member 37 is hardly set to the open position, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high ball entry state are referred to as “time reduction mode”. A certain state is called a “probable mode”, and a state that is a high probability state and a low ball entry state is called a “latent mode”.

  The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the variable display time of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( (Specified time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times of opening of the second starting prize device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than in the low ball entry state, and (5) A winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is lower than in the low ball entry state. To a higher state. The high ball entry state in the present embodiment employs the above configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. This makes it easier for the game balls to frequently win the second start winning device 33b, increases the number of executions of the success / failure lottery, and achieves a good ball holding state in which the decrease in the ball possessed by the player is suppressed. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probable change mode, and the latent mode are continued until the jackpot occurs, whereas the time reduction mode does not require the special display device 43a, even if the jackpot does not occur. When the variable display in 43b is performed a predetermined number of times, the process is terminated, and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

  In the probable change mode and the time reduction mode, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently to make it easy to enter the ball, while the first start winning device 33a enters the ball. Since it is not easy, the player fires the game ball toward the right area where the second starting winning device 33b is provided in the probable change mode or the time reduction mode (so-called “right strike”). To do). In addition, at the timing of the right-handed operation, an announcement urging the right-handed operation is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first start winning device 33a (so-called "navel") wins by a winning / rejection lottery performed when a game ball enters, and the second start winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip"). , Denchu ”), the type of hit given varies depending on whether or not a winning is determined in a winning / losing lottery performed when a game ball enters the type (type determination referred to when determining the type of hit state). Table is different).

  More specifically, the jackpot types when the jackpot is won based on the ball entry into the first starting winning device 33a include a 16-round jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "16RS") and an 8-round jackpot ( Hereafter, there are an 8 round normal jackpot (hereinafter, “8RN”) and a 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter, “2RS”). Regarding "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", the first variable prize device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or eight pieces of the first variable prize device 32a are opened after the first variable prize device 32a is opened. Assuming that one of the game balls enters as one round, the "16RS" is repeated 16 times, and the "8RS" and "8RN" are repeated eight times, and then the jackpot state ends. . On the other hand, regarding “2RS”, the opening of the first variable winning device 32a for 0.4 seconds is defined as one round, and this is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. That is, as for “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, although the jackpot is a jackpot in which a large increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state (so-called “hit jackpot with ball”), “2RS” is a game ball. (The so-called "no jackpot").

  After the jackpot states of “16RS” and “8RS”, “probable mode” is given, after the jackpot state of “2RS”, “latent mode” is given, and after the jackpot state of “8RN”, A “time reduction mode” (in this example, 90 variable displays) is provided. In other words, after the big hit state of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” ends, the second starting prize device 33b is in a high-ball-in state in which the open state is easily opened, so that the player plays the game toward the right region. Will fire a ball. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the ball entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the rate of 5% is “16RS”, the rate of 55% is “8RS”, and the rate of 30% Becomes "8RN", and becomes "2RS" at a rate of 10%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the winning / non-winning lottery based on the ball entry into the first start winning device 33a, a "small hit" may be won. In the lottery based on the ball entry into the first start winning device 33a, if a small hit is made, the opening of the first variable winning device 32a for 0.4 seconds is defined as one round, and this is repeated twice. From, the small hit state ends. That is, the first variable winning device 32a is apparently the same as “2RS”. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, for example, when the “2RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent mode. Even if the small hit is won in the normal mode, the normal mode is continued. As a result, in the win / win lottery based on the ball entry into the first start winning device 33a, the first variable prize can be performed without performing the sorting such as winning in the two round big hit (two round normal big hit) to which the high probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the fact that the device 32a is opened twice in a short period of time makes it sure that the device 32a has shifted to the high probability state.

  On the other hand, the jackpot types when the jackpot is won based on the ball entry into the second starting winning device 33b include a 16-round positive change jackpot, an 8-round positive change jackpot, and a 2-round normal jackpot (hereinafter, “2RN”). To say). Note that, when the winning is determined by the winning or losing lottery based on the ball entry into the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round end). Although the conditions are the same, the payout numbers (14 and 13) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, respectively, are different, but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b is used. For convenience, the same name (“16RS”, “8RS”) will be used for the type of jackpot in the case of winning in the winning / non-winning lottery based on entering the ball. In addition, in the present embodiment, the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. A certain number (8 wins or 1 round after 30 seconds) may be different (for example, the maximum number of wins of game balls in a round is 8 and 9).

  Regarding "2RN", the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, this is repeated twice, and then the big hit state ends. That is, for “16RS” and “8RS”, a large increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state, but “2RN” is a large jackpot where a large increase in game balls cannot be expected.

  After the big hit state of “2RN” ends, “time reduction mode” is given. In this example, “2RN” is also divided into three, and “2RN30” to which a time reduction mode for 30 times of variable display is given, “2RN60” to which a time reduction mode for 60 times of variable display is given, There is “2RN90” to which a time reduction mode for 90 times of display is given. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning / winning lottery based on the ball entry into the second starting winning device 33b, a rate of 35% is “16RS”, a rate of 35% is “8RS”, and a rate of 20% Becomes "2RN30" at a rate of 5%, "2RN60" at a rate of 5%, and "2RN90" at a rate of 5%.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a small hit may be won in a win / fail lottery based on a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. In the lottery based on the ball entry into the second starting winning device 33b, if a small hit is made, the opening of the second variable winning device 32b for 0.4 seconds is set as one round, and this is repeated twice. From, the small hit state ends. That is, the appearance of the second variable winning device 32b is the same as “2RN” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. In other words, the high probability state such as the probability change mode basically shifts to the low probability state (time reduction mode or the like) by winning "2RN". The mode continues. As a result, the second variable winning device 32b is opened shortly and twice without performing the sorting of winning the two rounds of probability change jackpot “2RS” in the winning / rejecting lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the user always knows that the state has shifted to the low probability state.

  Now, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 40, in the present embodiment, a game to the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is provided adjacent to the lower right of the substantially elliptical game area. During the variable display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b and the special display devices 43a and 43b in which the variable display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery performed based on the ball entry is performed. When a game ball enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b, a first hold display device 46a and a second hold display device 46b indicating that a variable display corresponding to the hit ball is held and stored. And a normal symbol display device 41 for performing a variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34, and a through symbol during the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41. When a game ball is passed to the port 34, a composite display device unit 40 is provided, in which a normal hold display device 44 indicating that a variable display corresponding to the passing is held and stored is unitized. .

  As shown in FIG. 44 and the like, in the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal A display device such as the hold display device 44 that is directly controlled by the main control device 261 is mounted on a single board. Hereinafter, the substrate on which the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are mounted is referred to as " Main display 49 ".

  In the present embodiment, the window 101 of the front frame set 14 is located adjacent to the lower right of the game area so that the composite display unit 40 installed outside the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 is formed to extend downward and to the right in a front view (see FIGS. 1 to 3).

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the first special display device 43a includes eight LEDs (hereinafter, referred to as “first special figure lamp 401”). The first special figure lamps 401 are arranged at equal intervals of four in each of two upper and lower rows, and are arranged such that the lower row is shifted to the right by one lamp relative to the upper row. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, a switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp 401 is performed on the first special display device 43a.

  The second special display device 43b includes eight LEDs (hereinafter, referred to as “second special figure lamps 402”), and is arranged below the first special display device 43a. The second special figure lamps 402 are also arranged at equal intervals of four in each of the upper and lower two rows, and are arranged such that the lower row is shifted to the right by one lamp relative to the upper row. Then, the switching display (variable display) of the second special figure lamp 402 is performed on the second special display device 43b when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b.

  Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the winning / rejection lottery. That is, the lighting mode (variable combination of the lit first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402) when the variable display is stopped is associated with various results of the winning / rejecting lottery. Is stopped, the result of the win / loss lottery, that is, "big hit", "small hit", or "miss" is definitely displayed. Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the jackpot types, that is, "16RS", "8RS", "8RN", "2RS", "2RS", are determined depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped. 2RN "is also taught. The first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that teach various types of jackpot types, small hits, and misses, respectively, have not one stop mode but a plurality of stop modes, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. You.

  Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed. Furthermore, if the next variable display is not performed after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b even after the specified time has elapsed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b is not displayed. The special display device 43b is configured to switch from a lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / rejecting lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which the variable display is not performed.

  In the left-right direction, the positions of the leftmost first special figure lamp 401 and the leftmost second special figure lamp 402 are aligned, and the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 are aligned. The positions of the two special figure lamps 402 are aligned. Further, the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 of the present embodiment use the same product LED (light emitting means). That is, a row in which four LEDs arranged on the left and right are displaced to the left (upper row of special figure lamps 401 and 402) and a row displaced to the right (lower row of special figure lamps 401 and 402) are arranged vertically. It is dressed like alternating.

  In addition, a first hold display device 46a and a second hold display device 46b are arranged above the first special display device 43a. The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b are respectively provided with two LEDs arranged side by side (hereinafter, an LED constituting the first hold display device 46a is referred to as a "first hold lamp 403", The LED constituting the display device 46b is referred to as a “second holding lamp 404”).

  The second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404) is disposed to the right of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403). Further, in the left-right direction, the rightmost second reserved lamp 404 is located at the same position as the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and second special figure lamp 402, and the first reserved lamp 403 and the second reserved lamp The installation interval of 404 is the same as that of the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402.

  In the present embodiment, a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter, referred to as “first variation display”), and the entry of a game ball into the second start winning device 33b. The variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “second variable display”) based on the above can be held and stored up to four times (total of eight times). For example, when the first variable display is held for one time, the first holding lamp 403 on the left is turned on. When the first variable display is held for two times, the left and right first holding lamps 403 are used. Lights up, and when the first variable display is held for three times, the first hold lamp 403 on the left flashes and the first hold lamp 403 on the right is turned on, and the first variable display is held for four times. In this case, the first left and right holding lamps 403 blink. When a new game ball wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the display of the fluctuation is also suspended.

  Note that the suspended variable displays are basically digested in the reserved order, but if both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended, the second variable display is used. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, unless the second variable display triggered by the prize in the second start winning device 33b is completely exhausted, the first variable display triggered by the ball in the first start prize device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp 403 is lit, when a game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b and one second holding lamp 404 is lit, the first variable display is postponed. Then, the second variable display is performed first.

  Further, below the second special display device 43b, a normal symbol display device 41 and a normal hold display device 44 are arranged. The ordinary symbol display device 41 and the ordinary reservation display device 44 are respectively provided with two LEDs arranged side by side (hereinafter, the LEDs constituting the ordinary symbol display device 41 are referred to as “regular lamps 405” and constitute the ordinary reservation display device 44. This LED is referred to as a “normal holding lamp 406”).

  The ordinary holding display device 44 (ordinary holding lamp 406) is arranged on the right side of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (ordinary lamp 405). Further, in the left-right direction, the leftmost general-purpose lamp 405 is located at the same position as the leftmost first special-purpose lamp 401 and second special-purpose lamp 402, and the general-purpose lamp 405 and the normal holding lamp 406 are installed. The intervals are the same as those of the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402.

  The ordinary symbol display device 41 has a configuration in which, for example, the passage of a game ball to the through gate 34 triggers, for example, a blinking display (variation display) of a right-hand general lamp 405 on the right side. After the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the ordinary symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the ball entry support lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (combination of the lit general-purpose lamps 405) and the various results of the ball entry support lottery are associated with each other, and the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped. Thereby, the result of the ball entry support lottery is definitely displayed. For example, turning on both the left and right general-purpose lamps 405 indicates “winning”, and turning on only the left general-purpose lamp 405 indicates “disengagement”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 performed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 can be held and stored up to four times. For example, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the ordinary holding lamp 406 on the left side is turned on, and when the variable display is held twice, the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned on. In the case of three holdings, the left ordinary holding lamp 406 blinks, and the right ordinary holding lamp 406 turns on. In the case of four holdings, the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 blink. I do. If a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the big hit state, the display of the fluctuation is also suspended.

  Further, the first holding lamp 403, the second holding lamp 404, the ordinary holding lamp 406, and the general drawing lamp 405 of the present embodiment are LEDs of the same product as the first special drawing lamp 401 and the second special drawing lamp 402. I'm using That is, a row in which four LEDs arranged on the left and right are displaced to the left (an upper row of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and a row composed of the ordinary holding lamp 406 and the ordinary figure lamp 405), and (The lower row of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the row composed of the first holding lamp 403 and the second holding lamp 404) are arranged alternately up and down.

  In addition, on the main display device 49 (substrate thereof), a position above the first special figure lamp 401 located on the left side of the first holding lamp 403 and the leftmost side, and a right side of the general figure lamp 405 and At a position below the second special figure lamp 402 located on the rightmost side, a mounting hole 408 for penetrating the board back and forth and mounting a screw is formed.

  Further, the outer shape of the substrate of the main display device 49 is such that the first special figure lamp 401, the second special figure lamp 402, the first holding lamp 403, the second holding lamp 404, and the normal holding are arranged generally in a matrix. It has a substantially rectangular shape so as to surround the lamp 406, the general lamp 405, and the mounting hole 408. However, the portion of the substrate of the main display device 49 where no lamp is provided between the leftmost first special figure lamp 401 and the leftmost second special figure lamp, the leftmost second special figure lamp A portion where no lamp is provided between 402 and the left ordinary holding lamp 406, and a portion where no lamp is provided between the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and the right second holding lamp 404 A cutout portion 409 (see FIG. 44) is formed at a portion where no lamp is provided between the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and the rightmost second special figure lamp 402.

  Now, the composite display device unit 40 of the present embodiment includes a sub-display device 411 that is provided adjacent to the left and right sides of the main display device 49 and that is display-controlled by the sub-control device 262. . As shown in FIG. 44, the substrate of the sub-display device 411 has a shape that matches the left side or the right side of the substrate of the main display device 49, and a main body in which four LEDs can be arranged vertically. A main portion 412, a mounting portion 413 protruding from an upper side and a lower side of the main body 412, and having mounting holes 414 for mounting screws, respectively, and protruding from the main body 412 toward the substrate side of the main display device 49. It has a pair of upper and lower protrusions 415 that are inserted into the notch 409 and can be installed with one LED at a time.

  The LED mounted on the sub display device 411 (hereinafter, referred to as “sub lamp 417”) is the same product as the LED mounted on the main display device 49. Further, the four sub lamps 417 installed on the main body 412 are installed so that the positions thereof are aligned with the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 of the main display device 49 in the vertical direction. Also, in the left-right direction, the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 are installed in accordance with the installation interval. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, FIG. 43, and the like, the sub lamp 417 of the pair of left and right sub display devices 411 and the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 of the main display device 49 are collectively formed. When viewed, the same LEDs are arranged in a matrix of 4 columns × 7 rows.

  In the sub display device 411, the switching display of the sub lamp 417 is started in synchronization with the start of the variable display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, and the first special display device 43a and the second special display device are started. The switching display of the sub lamp 417 ends in synchronization with the end (stop display) of the fluctuation display in 43b. Furthermore, the stop mode of the sub-display device 411 is not associated with the results of various lotteries such as the winning / rejecting lottery. There is no.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like, the composite display device unit 40 includes a mounting panel 421 for mounting the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411. The mounting panel 421 has a substantially rectangular plate shape that can cover the entire front surface of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 on which various lamps (LEDs) are mounted, and is made of a transparent resin. Further, the mounting panel 421 has a plurality of insertion holes 422 into which various lamps of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 can be individually inserted. In addition, the mounting panel 421 is formed with screw holes 423 and 424 which are aligned with the mounting holes 408 and 414 of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 and fixed by screws.

  Then, various lamps are inserted into the insertion holes 422 from the rear side of the mounting panel 421 until the substrates of the main display unit 49 and the sub display unit 411 abut against the rear surface of the mounting panel 421. The main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 are aligned with the screw holes 423 and 424 of the mounting panel 421 and the mounting holes 408 and 414 of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411. Fix it. As a result, the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 are attached and fixed to the attachment panel 421.

  In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a (first special figure lamp 401) and the second special display device 43b (second special figure lamp 402) constitute a main display unit and a main control display unit. The display device 411 (sub lamp 417) forms a sub display unit and a sub control display unit. Further, the variable display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b corresponds to a fixed display, and the variable display on the sub-display device 411 corresponds to a pseudo display. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes an effect display means, and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the effect display.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the left and right sides of the substrate of the main display device 49 have a stepped shape in which a portion on the rear surface side is cut out. On the other hand, the side of the substrate of the sub-display device 411 on the side of the main display device 49 has a stepped shape in which a portion on the front side is cut out, and the mounting panel 421 of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 is provided. In the state of attachment to the main display device 49, the step portion of the main display device 49 and the step portion of the sub-display device 411 overlap each other (the step portion of the main display device 49 is different from the step portion of the sub-display device 411 and the mounting panel 421). Are sandwiched between). Thus, even in a configuration where the mounting holes 408 of the main display device 49 are formed only at two locations, the mounting state of the main display device 49 can be stabilized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the mounting panel 421 includes a pair of left and right mounting pieces 426 protruding left and right from the sub-display device 411 mounted on the mounting panel 421. A pair of upper and lower mounting holes 427 that penetrate the mounting panel 421 is formed in the mounting panel 421. The mounting hole 427 of this embodiment has a shape that allows a flathead screw to be mounted, and the head of the flathead screw is immersed in the mounting hole 427 when the flathead screw is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 41, the composite display device unit 40 includes a base member 431 for attaching the composite display device unit 40 to the front side of the game board 30. The base member 431 is provided at a position corresponding to each of the mounting holes 427 of the mounting panel 421 and the base plate 432 having a substantially rectangular plate shape which is mounted in contact with the front surface of the game board 30. And a boss 433 for mounting at a predetermined distance from the boss. The boss 433 of the base member 431 and the mounting hole 427 of the mounting panel 421 are aligned and fixed with screws, so that the mounting panel 421 is mounted on the base member 431.

  In addition, a screw hole (not shown) is formed in the base plate 432, and a screw is screwed into the game board 30 through the screw hole, so that the base member 431 is attached to the front surface of the game board 30. Installed. As a result, the composite display device unit 40 is attached and fixed to the front side of the game board 30.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like, the composite display device unit 40 can be displaced between a covering position that partially covers the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 and an exposure position that exposes the sub lamp 417. A covering shutter 441 is provided as a substantially rectangular plate-like covering means. The covering shutter 441 of the present embodiment covers or exposes four sub lamps 417 arranged vertically in the left sub-display device 411 (hereinafter also referred to as “first sub-display device 411a”) at a time. The first shutter 442 and the four sub lamps 417 arranged vertically in the right sub display device 411 (hereinafter also referred to as “second sub display device 411b”) are covered or exposed at a time. And a second shutter 443 that can perform the operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the base member 431 is formed with a concave rail portion 445 that supports the upper side and the lower side of each of the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, respectively. A pair of upper and lower supports 444 are provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, on the back side (rear side) of the covering shutter 441, below the mounting panel 421, the main display device 49, and the sub-display device 411 when mounted on the support base 444, and A rack portion 446 extending in the left-right direction is formed on a portion located above the lower support base 444.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the base member 431 is located below the mounting panel 421 and at a predetermined distance from the lower support base 444 so as to face the upper surface of the lower support base 444. A bearing stand 447 is provided at the upper position. Further, the bearing base 447 and the lower support base 444 are provided with a pair of upper and lower shaft supports (not shown) capable of supporting the shaft 449 (see FIG. 42) of the pinion 448. When the pinion 448 is installed so that the shaft portion 449 is pivotally supported by the support portion, and the upper side and the lower side of the cover shutter 441 are respectively inserted into the rail portions 445 of the support base 444, the rack portion of the cover shutter 441 is moved. 446 and pinion 448 are configured to mesh with each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 42, a shutter solenoid 451 as a coating driving means for rotating the pinion 448 is attached to the base member 431. The shutter solenoid 451 is installed such that the plunger 452 extends in the front-rear direction, and a rack member 453 that meshes with the pinion 448 is attached to the tip of the plunger 452. The shutter solenoid 451 is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262, and is driven and controlled by the sub-control device 262. Then, when the shutter solenoid 451 is in the excited state, the covering shutter 441 is displaced to the covering position, and when the shutter solenoid 451 is in the non-exciting state, the covering shutter 441 is displaced to the exposed position. It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 41, an opening 456 for exposing the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 to the front is formed in front of the composite display device unit 40, and the covering shutter at the exposure position is formed. A cover 455 capable of covering the front of 441 is provided.

  Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 that performs variable display in accordance with variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b.

  The decorative design display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to change and display the decorative design. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 controls the sub-control device 262 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and the display is controlled by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and a plurality of types of decorations are provided in each symbol display area. Symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers from 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variable display), and then sequentially for each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → medium symbol display) The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of the regions). For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined by the main controller 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43 a, 43 b, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines), and the big hit state Is started. In addition, among the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, basically, the upper symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed first is referred to as the “first symbol display area”. , And the lower symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed secondly is also referred to as the "second symbol display area", and the middle symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. This is also referred to as “third symbol display area”.

  When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, for example, as an earlier stage, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of the reach state does not necessarily result in a jackpot, and may sometimes deviate.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If it is performed (when the slot is stopped and displayed), a big hit state is given. In the case of odd-numbered slots, “16RS” or “8RS” occurs, and in the case of even-numbered slots, one of “16RS”, “8RS”, or “8RN” occurs.

  The combination of the decorative patterns other than the Zoro eyes basically teaches "out of alignment", but in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is "2RS" and "2RN", the decorative patterns are the Zoro eyes. Instead of being stopped and displayed in combination, it is stopped and displayed in a combination that becomes a reach symbol but becomes out of order. In addition, the "small hit" is also stopped and displayed in a combination that has become a reach symbol but is out of order.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, the “probable change stage” that determines that the user is staying in the probable mode, the “normal stage” that determines that the user stays in the normal mode, and either the probable mode or the time reduction mode There is a “pull-back stage” staying, and a “aura stage” staying in either the normal mode or the latent mode.

  For example, in the probability change stage, if "2RN" is won and the probability change mode ends, or if "small hit" is won, the probability change stage ends and the pullback stage is displayed. Then, if the player has won "2RN" and the period of the given time reduction mode has ended, the pullback stage ends and the normal stage is displayed. In addition, when the "small hit" is won, there is no change in the game mode before and after the "small hit". Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to hit the jackpot, and if the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (30 times, 60 times, or 90 times of the special symbol fluctuation display) is exceeded, It can be understood that the mode is the probable change mode.

  In the case where the jackpot is won in the winning / unwinning lottery performed based on the ball entry into the second starting winning device 33b, only the “16RS” and “8RS” are available as the jackpot types for displaying the slotted eyes on the decorative symbol display device 42. Absent. For this reason, basically (except for the case where the fluctuating display corresponding to the ball entry into the first starting winning device 33a held is exhausted), in the probable change stage or the pullback stage, that is, in the probable change mode or the time reduction mode. In the case where the jackpot is taught in the decorative symbol display device 42 with the slotted eyes, the provision of the probability change mode is determined, and after the state of the jackpot, the process proceeds to the probability change stage.

  Further, for example, when the player wins “2RS” in the normal stage and shifts to the latent mode, or when the player wins “small hit”, the normal stage ends and the precursor stage is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the "small hit" is a transition trigger, that is, when staying in the normal mode, the precursory stage displays a special symbol in a variable display for a period of about 10 to 50 times. After being derived in the above, the process returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when “2RS” is a transition trigger, that is, when staying in the latent mode, the stage is basically a precursor to a jackpot. It should be noted that a lottery may be performed to determine whether to return to the normal stage from the precursor stage, or a lottery may be performed to determine whether to return to the normal stage after returning to the normal stage from the precursor stage (in the case of the latent mode). (It is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage, or it is desirable to win only in the latent mode.) In the case of the precursor stage in the normal mode, the stay period when shifting to the precursor stage ( (The number of changes) may be determined (in the case of the latent mode, the precursor mode is maintained). In addition, in the case of winning or losing "8RN" in the winning or losing lottery based on the ball entry into the first start winning device 33a, and in the case of winning in "8RS", a probability change mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If it is not instructed to return, after the big hit state ends, the process proceeds to the pullback stage.

  As described above, when the correspondence between the special pattern lamps 401 and 402 in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the corresponding relationship with the jackpot type is known, the special symbol variation display stop mode is checked. If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot has been won.

  In the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the start winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (that the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is a decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also taught. For example, a hold icon indicating that the variable display is held is displayed in the lower left portion (hold display area) of the decorative symbol display device 42. A maximum of eight hold icons are displayed, and the icons are sequentially digested from the left. It should be noted that the hold icon of the present embodiment does not have information as to which of the first variable display and the second variable display the corresponding hold icon corresponds to. It forms an aspect.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is provided with a rail 50 for guiding a game ball fired from the firing device 60 to an upper portion of the game board 30. Thereby, the game ball fired by the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rail 61 and the rail 50.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a situation in which a game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50 again. A return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, a substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball hit by the launching device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball preventing member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. I will

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the rear side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication path 71 connected from a dispensing mechanism 352 to a discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15 described below, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the dispensing mechanism 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and returns on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is transferred to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Is discharged.

  Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by an urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end of the lower plate communication passage 71 on the entrance side. In addition, the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed. A game ball can pass through a gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow at the entrance side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It is paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a fullness detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate communication passage 71. The existence of the fullness detection switch grasps that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls stay in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected by the fullness detection switch for a predetermined time, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display, a sound, or the like on the decorative symbol display device 42. Is performed. It should be noted that when the game balls stay in the lower plate communication passage 71 and the game ball is no longer detected by the fullness detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

  Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so as to partially overlap one another, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is herein referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole at the center of the game board 30. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, which faces the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. Attached to.

  The decorative design display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative design display device 42 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface of the frame cover 213. Is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative design display device 42 (the accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and is fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board and the like for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 are provided. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside is visible.

  Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won various winning devices. The game balls collected by the ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage 217 described later, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mount for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  Main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined mark. Thereby, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various prize apparatuses, corresponding to various prize apparatuses such as the general prize apparatus 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general prize switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize device 31, and a first count switch is provided in the first variable prize device 32a and the second variable prize device 32b. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided, and an assist winning detection switch 227 is provided in the assist winning opening 48. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, the assist winning detection switch 227, the through gate switch 225, and the cable connector. A first board relay board to be electrically connected is provided. The first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

  The detection results detected by the various ball detection switches are taken into main controller 261. Then, a payout command (payout number of game balls) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are output based on an output signal from the payout control device 311. Is carried out (except for the case where it is detected by the through gate switch 225).

  In addition, although not shown, a large winning opening solenoid for opening a large winning opening with a first variable winning device 32a or a second variable winning device 32b is provided on the back surface of the gaming board 30. A winning opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 37 by the starting winning device 33b is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) for relaying these solenoids and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is obtained by integrating a resin-back pack 351 and a payout mechanism 352 for playing balls. The back pack unit 203 is supported to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (the upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like of a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, reference numerals are not given, but, for example, terminals for outputting information on the current game state (big hit state, probability change mode, etc.), front frame set 14 and inner frame detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information relating to the opening of the terminal 12; a terminal for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a bottom plate full error, a no tank ball error, and a payout error; and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover 354 also covers the upper part and the right part (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 together. Thus, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is provided vertically below the tank rail 356. Are linked. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and pays out a required number of game balls appropriately by a predetermined electric configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  In the dispensing mechanism 352, a dispensing relay board 381 for relaying a signal of a dispensing command from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in a main power from the outside is installed. I have. Main power of, for example, 24 V AC is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage 217 into which game balls collected by the above-described ball collection mechanism flow, and a game ball is provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each of the prize devices such as the general prize device 31 collect through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 also communicates with the discharge passage 217, and game balls that have not won any of the winning ports are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is good also as.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. Attached to.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Note that the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, but are actually configured by one board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a, and is fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that the trace of opening the board box 311a remains. Has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a, and is fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside is visible.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is depressed at the time of a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 358a, the payout motor 358a rotates forward and reverse to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the state at the time of the power failure is maintained, and when returning from the power failure (power recovery), it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, at the time of closing of the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored and retained. Input.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right rear surface of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into a key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the key is rotated by one side to rotate the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the extension wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower section corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 as described above. reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and to operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side. The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 has a detection unit that can protrude and retract with respect to the switch main body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261. When the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. The output is to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 to be turned off when the front frame set 14 is closed, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detecting portion is pressed by a pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to be turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the CPU 501 and a return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags, counters, and I / O are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data that is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing. Conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned on (including the power-on due to power failure and the same applies hereinafter). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to an NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

  If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to a CPU 501 including the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 includes a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, and a main display device 49 (first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, And the second hold display devices 46a and 46b, the normal hold display device 44), and the like. With this configuration, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 and the sub display device 411 are controlled via the sub control device 262.

  For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 includes general winning switches 221, count switches 223a and 223b, starting winning switches 224a and 224b, through gate switches 225, and various switches of the handle 18. And various electrical components such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminals (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminals and the like constitute the input / output port 505.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 as an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the program, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown). It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, and the RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected to the input / output port 554. Further, the input / output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, a sub display device 411, various illuminations, and lamps 102 and 104.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 indicate that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262 In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the display device, the variable symbol display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b.

  The payout control device 311 controls the payout of a prize ball or a loaned ball by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

  The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all data stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 513a are stored. Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the configuration may be such that data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, and data stored in the work area is not backed up.

  The backup area 513a includes a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and the like, in order to return the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off at the time of power-on when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This area stores values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, similarly to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which permission to pay out prize balls by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from the server.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting prize ball payout is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received. Is turned off when the process is restored before the power supply is shut down. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing an initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of a prize ball, and the main control device 261 is restored. These are the three payout return commands transmitted in such a case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. The command reception flag is turned on when any of the commands is received. The signal is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

  The command buffer includes a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from main controller 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all storage areas, the command is stored at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erasure switch circuit 543, the main control device 261, the firing control device 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and a return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged beside the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other to receive a command for a ball lending operation by the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are directly rented to the upper plate 19 from a ball rental device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the drive of the launch device 60 is permitted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, that the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, that the player has touched the steering wheel 18 is detected by a sensor signal, and that the firing prohibition button 18 a ( (See FIG. 1) is not operated, the firing device 60 is driven, and the game ball is fired at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes a variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And The input port 527 is connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262. The CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531. The output port 529 is connected to the decorative design display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and analyzes the received command or performs a predetermined operation based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes the various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the data.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an externally supplied 24 volt power supply, generates a +12 V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a +5 V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each of the NMI terminals of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when this voltage falls below 22 volts. The power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt process).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 543 is a circuit that captures a switch signal of the RAM erasure switch 323 and clears backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erasure switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasure switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasure signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including the power-on due to the blackout), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. You.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various types of counter information when playing a game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a hit random number counter C1 as a hit random number generation means used in a hit random determination of whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used in determining a big hit type (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, And the first variable type counter CS1 and the second variable type counter CS2 used for determining the variable display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42), and the lottery (input) of the normal symbol display device 41. The normal symbol random number counter C4 used for ball support lottery) is used. The change selection counter C3 is also used for lottery of the reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and changed. The change type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for selecting a change pattern (selection of an effect pattern) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and the variation time, that is, the effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

  Each time the counter C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the upper limit, it is a loop counter that returns to 0, which is the lower limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing respective values of a success / failure random number counter C1, a type determination counter C2, and a fluctuation selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4. A fluctuation holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). The values of the normal symbol random number counter C4 are stored in time series in each of the normal fluctuation holding areas in accordance with the history of game balls passing through the through gate 34. By employing this configuration, the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  Further, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation storage area each having four reservation areas (first to fourth reservation areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special change holding area, each value of a winning / failing random number counter C1, a type determination counter C2, and a change selection counter C3 is displayed in accordance with a winning history of a game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored sequentially. In each holding area of the second special change holding area, the respective values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored sequentially. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held up to four times each.

  To describe each counter in detail, the success / failure random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 599. The configuration is returned to. Normally, when the pass / fail random counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the pass / fail random counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once every timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the low probability state (the normal mode or the time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probable mode or latent mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the value is “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two hit / fail judgment tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when judging whether or not the value of the hit / fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. There is a first hit / fail judgment table storing "7, 307" as the big hit value, and a second hit / fail judgment table storing "8 to 16, 308 to 316" as the big hit value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery is performed using the hit random number counter C1 to determine whether or not a small hit has been won if the big hit has not been won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the random number counter C1 which is a small hit is one, the value is “404”, and the high probability state (probable change mode, latent mode) ), The number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and the value is “404 to 413”. In addition, in the small hit determination, a first small hit determination table storing "404" as a winning value and a second small hit determination table storing "405 to 413" as a winning value are referred to.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning a jackpot (small jackpot probability) is 1/300, and the probability of winning a small hit (small jackpot probability) is 1/600. The fluctuation time in the ordinary symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and when the ball is won by the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for 0.4 seconds.

  In the probability change mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60, which makes it easier to hit than in the normal mode. In the probability change mode, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode. The start winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is 4 seconds (opening for 4 seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds in between). That is, in the probability change mode, the fluctuation time in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second starting prize device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is longer, and the number of times of opening is larger. Increase. As a result, the time period in which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is lengthened, so that the game balls frequently enter the second start winning device 33b (become a high ball state). In addition, the success / absence lottery is continuously performed, and the ball is held in a good state. In the high ball entry state, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery may be set higher than in the low ball entry state.

  In the time reduction mode, the big hit probability is 1/300 and the small hit probability is 1/600. In the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the ball is won by the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. And each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, in the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability is the same low probability as that in the normal mode, but only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is the same as the probability change mode. In the present embodiment, after the big hit state of “8RN” or “2RN” ends, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b display a total of a variable number of display times (90 times after “8RN”). The time reduction mode is set for “2RN” for 30 times (“2RN30”), 60 times (“2RN60”), and 90 times (“2RN90”). Further, the time reduction mode ends when the specified number of variable displays are performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b, even after the big hit state does not occur, and then the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In the latent mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. Also, in the latent mode, the fluctuation time of the symbol display device 41 is usually 8 seconds, and when winning in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, in the latent mode, although the jackpot probability is the same high probability as that in the probability changing mode, only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is the same as the normal mode. In the present embodiment, the latent mode is set after the big hit state of “2RS” ends, and is continued at least until the big hit state occurs. In the present embodiment, when the winning is determined by the winning or failing lottery based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, there is no allocation of winning the "2RN", so the latent mode ends quietly. Such a situation is avoided (it is continued until a jackpot with a payout is won).

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and to reach an upper limit (that is, 19) and then return to 0 as a lower limit. Further, the ROM 502 stores a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) and a second type determination which are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when a jackpot is won in the winning / decreasing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (type lottery is performed), and the determined jackpot state is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to reach an upper limit value (that is, 238) and then return to 0 as a lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the reach state of the decorative symbol is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and then the "reach out of front and rear reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and the reach state similarly occurs. The "reach other than front and rear departure" in which the rear final stop symbol is stopped other than before and after the reach symbol and the "complete departure" in which the reach state does not occur are determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The value of “0 to 238” is stored in the reach determination table, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the out-of-order reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to reach other than the out-of-order reach, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It is configured to cope with disconnection.

  The variation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the change selection counter C3 stored in the change selection counter buffer is stored in the special change holding area of the RAM 503. .

  In addition, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 59, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59) and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 37, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 37), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. For example, the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough design variation modes are determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and the final stop symbol is generated after the reach occurs by the second variation type counter CS2. A finer pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until the (in this example, the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of variation patterns. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. The buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter which is added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99 and returns to an upper limit value (that is, 99, and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. Normal symbols). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the right or left through gate 34. The number of random numbers to be won in the ball state is one, and the range is “1.” On the other hand, the number of random numbers to be won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is obtained, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the ordinary symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning is obtained. ("○" in this example) is stopped Shown, it is opened in a pattern in which the second start winning apparatus 33b is corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in a 2 msec cycle in the present embodiment), and a stop signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of ".". For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly proceeds to the next process.

  If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is provided based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ). Further, upon outputting the winning ball command, the value of each winning ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, a random number initial value update process is performed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, a random number update process is performed. Specifically, each of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum values (599, 19 in this embodiment, respectively). , 238, 99) are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in a step S304, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a ball (winning) in the start winning devices 33a, 33b, and in a step S305, a through gate passing process is executed in accordance with the passing of a game ball to the through gate. . Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The RAM 503 has a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by a prize in the first start winning device 33a, and a hold of the variable display triggered by a prize in the second start winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb for counting the number is provided.

  In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area have a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1, a winning type random number storing area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and A reach random number storage area for storing a value is provided. In this embodiment, the pass / fail random number storage area stores the value of the pass / fail random counter C1 using 2 bytes. The winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area each use one byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, the first fluctuation display based on winning on the first start winning device 33a or the second fluctuation display based on winning on the second start winning device 33b is displayed. There is provided a variable storage area in which information indicating whether the variable is stored. Hereinafter, "the information indicating the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set ON", and "the second variable display is displayed in the variable storage area." Is stored "is also referred to as" the second variation flag is set ON ".

  First, in step S501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than an upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, an addition display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when both of the pair of left and right second holding lamps 404 are off, the left second holding lamp 404 is turned on, the left second holding lamp 404 is on, and the right second holding lamp 404 is turned on. When both the left and right second holding lamps 404 were turned on when the 404 was off, the second holding lamp 404 on the right side was turned on when both the left and right second holding lamps 404 were on. When the second holding lamp 404 on the left is blinking, and the second holding lamp 404 on the left is blinking and the second holding lamp 404 on the right is lighting, the left and right second holding lamps 404 blink. Perform a process for causing

  After step S504, in step S505, the respective values of the pass / fail random counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 (the success / fail random counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation Each of the values stored in the selection counter buffer is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas of the special fluctuation holding area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area). After step S505, the process moves to step S506.

  In step S506, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. The details of the success / failure determination processing will be described later.

  In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A reach determination process for determining the type of reach at the time of fluctuation is performed. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the success / failure determination processing in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area matches one of the values “7” and “307” stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that will be a big hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is described in a simplified manner. However, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is “307”. If one of these determinations is affirmatively determined, the determination in step S5101 is affirmative. In the case where a negative determination is made also in the above, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first success / failure flag is turned on in step S5102, followed by terminating the present process. In the present embodiment, in addition to the random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1, a random flag is not separately provided, and information as to whether a big hit state occurs in the random number storage area is provided. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the pass / fail random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in step S5102, for example, “1010101010101010” is set in the pass / fail random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting of the appropriate random number storage area will be described as turning on the first appropriateness flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value stored in the second success / failure determination table, “8 to 16, 308”. .. 316 ”is determined. By the way, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that will be a big hit only in the probability change mode. Note that, at the time of the determination process as well, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and the process ends. Here, turning on the second success / failure flag means that, for example, “1100110011001100” is set in the success / failure random number storage area.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, when the state is “out” even in the high probability state, in step S5105, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to the first value. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value “404” stored in the small hit determination table. Incidentally, “404” is a value that is a small hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, followed by terminating the present process. In this embodiment, information on whether or not a small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5105, in step S5107, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value “405 to 413” stored in the second small hit determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “405 to 413” is a value that is a big hit only in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the information related to the pass / fail is stored using 2 bytes. Therefore, for example, when noise occurs, the pass / fail flag (the storage content of the pass / fail random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot state occurs without winning, or a situation in which a jackpot state does not occur despite winning. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the hit random number storage area in the hit determination processing is a pattern that is not used when the value of the hit random number counter C1 is stored in the hit random number storage area. is there.

  At this time, the value of the random number counter C1 is kept stored, for example, by separately providing a random number flag in addition to the random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1. In the variable display setting process performed at the time of starting, a configuration may be adopted in which a corresponding table is referred to based on the value of the random number counter C1 to determine whether or not it is appropriate. Further, a random number counter for small hits may be provided separately from the success / failure random number counter C1 used for the big hit determination.

  Next, the second type determination processing in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether the first or second hit / fail flag has been set to ON in the hit / fail judgment process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility of the occurrence of the big hit state), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility of a big hit state), in step S5402, the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area by referring to the second type determination table It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, followed by terminating the present process.

  In the present embodiment, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and "16RS" is stored in the winning type random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses one byte, and in step S5403, for example, “10101010” is set in the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as “16RS” in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag (16RS flag or the like) indicating a jackpot type. explain. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determination processing is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, then in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RS” by referring to the second type determination table. It is determined whether any one of "7 to 13" matches. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, then in step S5405, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, “00011111” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN30” in step S5406 by referring to the second type determination table. It is determined whether any one of "14 to 17" matches. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, in step S5407 the 2RN30 flag is turned on, and this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5406, then in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN60” by referring to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches "18". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, in step S5409, the 2RN60 flag is turned on, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value “19” corresponding to “2RN90”. After turning on the flag, the present process is terminated. In the type determination process, it is sufficient that the type of jackpot can be determined. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16RS” having a large number of random numbers corresponding to the winning matches the acquired random number, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2RN90” matches the obtained random number value.

  Next, the reach determination processing in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first determination flag has been set in the determination processing performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is a jackpot in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot state always occurs), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot state does not occur at least in the low-probability state (there is a possibility of being missed), in step S5302, the reach determination table is referred to and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the change selection counter C3 stored in the special change reservation area matches one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “out-of-order reach”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303 a front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of out-of-front / rear reach is turned on, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, no separate front-back flag is provided in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses one byte, and in step S5303, for example, “10101010” is set in the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front and rear flags.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, then in step S5304, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation reservation area corresponds to “reach other than the front and rear departure” with reference to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches any one of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, a flag other than before and after is set to on in step S5305, and this processing ends. Here, turning on the flag other than before and after means that, for example, “11001100” is set in the reach random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the variable display ends "completely out of range" without going through the reach state, the process ends as it is. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination processing is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in a step S509 following the step S508, a setting process of a starting command is performed. In addition, in the first command, the fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) stored and held is triggered by the first start prize device 33a or the second start prize device 33b. And information indicating the results of the hit / fail determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing, and output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). .

  After the processing of step S509, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S510, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 by the first start winning switch 224a. Is determined based on the detection information. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S511, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a is set to the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “4”) is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S511, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S511, the process proceeds to step S512, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S513, an addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (the first hold lamp 403) corresponding to the increase of the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right first holding lamps 403 are off, the left first holding lamp 403 is turned on, the left first holding lamp 403 is turned on, and the right first holding lamp 403 is turned on. When the lamp 403 is in the unlit state, the left and right first holding lamps 403 are turned on. When the lamps 403 are in the lighting state, the right first holding lamp 403 is turned on. When the first holding lamp 403 on the left is blinking, and the first holding lamp 403 on the left is blinking and the first holding lamp 403 on the right is lighting, the first holding lamp 403 on both the left and right blinks. Perform a process for causing

  After step S513, in step S514, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3 are stored in the special change hold area that is free (a random number storage area, a random number storage area, and a random number storage area). (Reach random number storage area). After step S514, control proceeds to step S515.

  In step S515, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination processing have already been described above.

  In the following step S516, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, a case in which a jackpot is won in a winning / winning lottery based on a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and a case in which a jackpot is won in a winning / winning lottery based on a ball entering the second startup winning device 33b. , The distribution of the jackpot types to be given is different.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether the first or second hit / fail flag has been set to ON in the hit / fail judgment process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit state), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility of a big hit state), in step S5202 the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is referred to with reference to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, followed by terminating the present process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RN” by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether any one of "12 to 17" matches. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, then in step S5205, the 8RN flag is turned on, and the process ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5204, in step S5206, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RS” by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches one of “18, 19”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207, and the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and the process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, when it is determined in step S515 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is newly obtained. A reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the selection counter C3. The details of the reach determination processing have been described above.

  After step S517, in step S518, a setting process of a starting command is performed, and the process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the hit random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and thereafter, the hit determination process is performed. , The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area (work area) for temporarily storing the value of the hit random number counter C1 or the like when the counter value is acquired is provided, and the information stored in the temporary storage area is determined by a hit determination process, After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the suspension area of the corresponding special fluctuation suspension area.

  The process of extracting the value of the random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes a determination value extraction process, and similarly stores the value of the random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S514 in the special fluctuation holding area. The processing constitutes the determination value storage processing. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in Steps S506 and S515 (Steps S5101, S5103, S5105, and S5107) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes a first success / failure determination process. Then, the processing of steps S5102, S5104, S5106, and S5108 for storing the determination result (setting the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

  Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspended variable displays performed by the ordinary symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the ordinary holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the ordinary holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  Further, in the subsequent step S604, an addition display process of the ordinary holding display device 44 (ordinary holding lamp 406) corresponding to the increase of the number of held variable display in the ordinary symbol display device 41 by one is performed. That is, when both of the pair of left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned off, the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on, the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on, and the right ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned off. When both of the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned on, the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 remain on while the right and left ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned on. Is blinked, and if the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is in a blinking state and the right ordinary holding lamp 406 is in a lighting state, processing for blinking both the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 is performed.

  After step S504, in step S605, a random number related to success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number updating process in step S303 is stored in the first of the free storage areas of the ordinary fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passage process ends.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power-off occurrence information setting, and the NMI interrupt process is executed. finish.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main process is started with a reset at the time of power-on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable. The wait process is executed for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply 313 is pressed (ON). If the switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. I do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in subsequent step S104 whether or not power-off information has been set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the setting is not made, the backup data is not stored, so that the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power was turned off. That is, the validity of the backup is determined. If the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup can be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). In addition, when the power-off information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (such as a checksum value), the process also proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 and the like). That is, in step S113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. After that, in step S111, interruption permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that the power-off occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the process at the time of power restoration (the process at the time of power-off restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information of the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

  In step S109, a command to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, in step S111, interruption permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing in steps S201 to S211 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S212 and S213 is executed in the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the settings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning devices 33a and 33b updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is An external output process for transmitting to each control device on the side is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays a decorative symbol in a variable manner, a variable pattern command, a symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the fluctuation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, and the like, determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, and the like) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and Is instructed to the display control device 45 to display (variable display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The fluctuation pattern command includes information for specifying the fluctuation type of the decorative symbol, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variable display based on the variable pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and the sound.

  Here, the variation type of the decorative symbol will be described. “Normal reach” is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for the variation of the decorative pattern. In the probable change mode and the time shortening mode, the variable display time is shorter than that in the normal mode and the latent mode, even in various reach cases. For example, the fluctuation display time from which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent mode, and “10 seconds” in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode.

  In the “super reach”, a display in which a specific character or the like performs a specific operation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established). This is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In the present embodiment, three types of super reach, that is, super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

  "Premium Reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs. During a decorative pattern change display (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character having a pattern different from the super reach, etc. Is displayed in the display pattern, and thereby, the reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In the present embodiment, two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach.

  In addition, the variable display time for “completely deviating” that does not reach any of the reach states is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode and “6 seconds” in the positive change mode and the time reduction mode.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the elapse of the fluctuation time. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. The symbol combination is a combination of a probability variable jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of chance symbols, a combination of front and rear deviating symbols, and a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviating symbols. The combination and the combination of completely deviated symbols are designated. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols is stored in a table in the sub control device 262. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops and displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

  In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the elapse of the fluctuation time. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, and includes a combination of a probability variable jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of front and rear deviating symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear departures, and a completely deviated symbol. Are designated as five categories. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols is stored in a table in the sub control device 262. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops and displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the symbol commands.

  Winning a probable jackpot ("16RS" and "8RS"; hereinafter also referred to as "probable jackpot with ball out") where an increase in game balls can be expected, or a normal jackpot ("8RN") where an increase in game balls can be expected In the following, in the case of winning the "normal jackpot with payout"), the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the decorative symbol with the numeral pattern in a combination that becomes a slot. It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probable jackpot with payout”, the jackpot symbol, which is a combination of any one of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 odd-numbered zigzag symbols, or 2 , 4, 6, and 8, the variable display is stopped and displayed in either combination of the normal jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of an even number of the zigzag pattern. In this case, the variable display is usually stopped and displayed with the combination of the big hit symbols.

  Then, when the sub control device 262 receives the symbol command of the winning with a variable winning jackpot, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combinations of the symbols including any one of the first to ninth symbols as the stop symbol, and When the symbol command with the presence of the normal jackpot is received, one of the combinations of the symbols including any one of 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as the stop symbol.

  The combination of the front and rear departure symbols corresponds to "front and rear departure reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs. In the present embodiment, the combination of the off-front design is selected as the stop mode not only in the case of "out" but also in the case of winning in "2RS", "2RN", and "small hit". Has become.

  The combination of symbols other than front and rear deviations corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviations" in which the final stop symbol stops at locations other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after a reach occurs. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "completely off" in which even reach does not occur.

  As will be described in detail later, when the sub-control device 262 receives these out-of-design symbols, it determines the combination of the symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. In the present embodiment, three commands are prepared for the release symbol command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one type of release symbol command. It is good also as composition which determines a combination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. I do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the following step S203, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is performed. In this process, control regarding the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, and at the same time, determination of a jackpot and setting of variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of the special display control processing will be described later.

  In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, in the case where the first variable winning device 32a is won by a winning / rejecting lottery based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, a big hit state or a small hit state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. I have. Details of the first variable winning device control processing will be described later.

  In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, in the case where the winning is determined in the winning / winning lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, a big hit state or a small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. I have. The details of the second variable winning device control processing will be described later.

  In step S208, a normal display control process is performed. In this process, the control related to the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of the ordinary display control processing will be described later.

  In step S209, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the start winning devices 33a and 33b is performed. Details of the start winning device control processing will be described later.

  After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S211 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Is determined. If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is repeatedly executed (Step S212, Step S213).

  That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation can be similarly performed. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), it means that the power supply has been shut down, and the processing after step S214 is executed as the power failure processing when the power supply is cut off. Is In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S216. To memorize.

  Then, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been turned off is transmitted to another control device (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S218, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S219, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  Note that the processing in step S210 is performed when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S209 is completed, or when one cycle of the processing in steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time is completed. It is executed at a certain timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503 a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. And can be easily stored. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited before the data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is turned off, and to reliably store the state before the power is turned off. .

  Next, the special display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of a fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval period set after the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is the fluctuation interval period, in step S802, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is decremented, and the process ends. That is, for example, when the variation interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and “249 (“ 250 ”when step S802 is performed before step S801)” is set in the variation interval timer. In the processing, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec, and becomes “0” after one second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not the fluctuation interval period, in step S803, a hit state storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and a state other than the current big hit state or small hit state Is determined.

  During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b to when the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, After the last round, a special display device, after a round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is in the open state, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is in the closed state, There is an ending period until the variable display of 43a and 43b can be started.

  During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b to when the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, After the last round, a special display device, after a round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is in the open state, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is in the closed state, There is an ending period until the variable display of 43a and 43b can be started.

  In the hit situation storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state and the small hit state, and “1” in the opening period and the interval period in the big hit state and the small hit state. , "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the hit state storage area, and it is determined whether the state is a big hit state or a small hit state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if a large hit state or a small hit state is in progress, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S803, step S804 will be described in detail later. The setting state of the special figure display flag is determined, and it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performing variable display. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being displayed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is stopped and the variable display is stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is started, and the flag of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is turned on. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  When a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, when neither the big hit state nor the small hit state nor the fluctuation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S805, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are performed. , A display mode (for example, only the first and second first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 from the right in the lower row) corresponding to the fluctuation standby state in which the fluctuation display is not performed. Standby display setting for deriving the mode in which is turned on). That is, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment maintain the stop mode (in a mode indicating the result of the success / failure lottery) during the change interval period after the change stop. However, when the fluctuation interval period ends, the display mode is switched to a display mode indicating that the apparatus is in the fluctuation standby state.

  After step S805, the process proceeds to step S806 to determine whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds of the second variable display triggered by the ball entry into the second start winning device 33b is greater than “0”. Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, that is, if at least one second variable display is on hold, in step S807, 1 is subtracted from the second on-hold counter Nb. In the present embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored by the determination processing in step S806, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is held and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is prioritized and digested (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S808, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the second special fluctuation reserved area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted such as area → first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area, and so on.

  After step S808, in step S809, a subtraction display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404) corresponding to the decrease in the number of holds of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second holding lamps 404 are both blinking, the right second holding lamp 404 is turned on while the left second holding lamp 404 is blinking, and the left second holding lamp 404 is turned on. When the second holding lamp 404 on the right side is in a lighting state, the left and right second holding lamps 404 are turned on, and when both the left and right second holding lamps 404 are on, Indicates that the left second holding lamp 404 is turned off while the left second holding lamp 404 is turned on, the left second holding lamp 404 is turned on, and the right second holding lamp 404 is turned off. , A process for extinguishing both the left and right second holding lamps 404 is performed.

  After step S809, in step S810, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, that is, if no second change display is held and stored, in step S811, the first change triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a is triggered. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na for counting the number of hold of the display is larger than 0.

  If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S811, in step S812, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na. In a succeeding step S813, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted such as area → first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area, and so on.

  After step S813, in step S814, a subtraction display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) corresponding to the decrease in the number of holds of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first holding lamps 403 are both blinking, the right first holding lamp 403 is turned on while the left first holding lamp 403 is blinking, and the left first holding lamp 403 is turned on. When the first holding lamp 403 on the right side is in a lighting state, the left and right first holding lamps 403 are turned on. Indicates that the left first holding lamp 403 is turned on while the left first holding lamp 403 is turned on, the left first holding lamp 403 is turned on, and the right first holding lamp 403 is turned off. , A process for extinguishing both the left and right first holding lamps 403 is performed.

  After step S814, variable display setting processing is performed in step S810, and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation suspension area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area and the second special fluctuation reservation area are used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. Then, it is shifted to the common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting processing in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the camera is in a high probability state (probable mode or latent mode) by referring to a mode storage area described later in detail. The mode storage area stores determination information for determining the game mode. In this embodiment, any one of “11”, “12”, “21”, and “22” is stored in the mode storage area, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probable mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area, thereby determining whether or not the state is in the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the state is the high probability state (probable change mode or latent mode), in step S902, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is considered, It is determined whether or not either the first or second hit / fail flag (see the hit / fail judgment processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the winning / rejecting lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the vehicle is in the low probability state (normal mode or time reduction mode), in step S903, the first random flag is turned on with reference to the random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the win / loss lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot determination flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been determined is set to ON. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the big hit state in the hit random number storage area is referred to as setting the big hit determination flag to ON.

  In a succeeding step S905, it is determined whether or not the second variation flag is set on, taking into account the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area, that is, the variation display to be performed is sent to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the display is the second variable display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery triggered by the entry of the ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the 16RS flag (see the type determination process in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to on in step S906, taking into account the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. It is determined whether or not it has been performed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if “16RS”, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of “16RS”, and is performed based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns of the display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display time, the mode of stopping the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42, the effect pattern of the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the like. ) Is determined, and a variation pattern command and a symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the flow shifts to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON with reference to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if “8RS”, an 8RS pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, control proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, a 2RN30 pattern setting process is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process moves to step S931.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, a 2RN60 pattern setting process is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process moves to step S931.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, when the 2RN90 flag is set to ON, a 2RN90 pattern setting process is performed in step S914. After step S914, control proceeds to step S931.

  Further, when the negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variable display performed this time is the first variable display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set to ON in consideration of the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S916. After step S916, the flow shifts to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, in step S917, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if “8RS”, an 8RS pattern setting process is performed in step S918. After step S918, control proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether the 8RN flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, an 8RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, control proceeds to step S931.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set to ON, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, control proceeds to step S931.

  When a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the first or the second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined in the high probability state that the small hit has been won in the win / loss lottery, in step S923, it is determined that the occurrence of the small hit state has been determined. Set the hit confirmation flag to ON. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the small hit state in the hit random number storage area is referred to as setting the small hit determination flag to ON. Thereafter, in step S924, a small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the flow shifts to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot has not been won in the low probability state, in step S925, the first random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation suspension area is taken into consideration, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that the small hit has been won in the winning / non-winning lottery in the low probability state, the small hit determination flag is set ON in step S923, and in step S924. After performing the small hit pattern setting process, the flow shifts to step S931.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is made, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is considered, and the front and rear flags (FIG. 17 (see reach determination process 17) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, if “reach out of front and rear” is set, a front and rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S927, and the process proceeds to step S931.

  When a negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on, with reference to the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if “reach other than front and rear departure” is performed, a reach pattern setting process other than front and rear is performed in step S929, and the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is “completely out of range”, the out-of-plane variation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and the process proceeds to step S931.

  In step S931, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is set on. This indicates that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b is satisfied. In the following step S932, a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is set. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43a and 43b. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process of the normal process based on the setting of the special figure display timer, Switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the sub-control device 262, which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command, starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b starts. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S932, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 and storing the value in the special fluctuation holding area, the success / failure determination process of steps S506 and 513, and the fluctuation display setting In the processing, a win / fail lottery is constituted by the processing of steps S901 to S903, step S922, step S925 and the like for determining the win / fail based on the win / fail flag and the small hit flag and the situation at that time. Also, the second success / failure determination processing is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903, S922, and S925, and the like. The variable display setting processing is configured by the processing of step S927, step S929, step S930, and the like.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the determination in step S804 is affirmative, that is, when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S815, in which the special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed once, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S816, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer has become “0”, the affirmative determination is made in step S816.

  When a negative determination is made in step S816, in step S821, a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. In the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b based on the setting content of the switching display setting. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Further, in step S822, the lighting mode of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b (the first hold lamp 403 and the second hold lamp 404) (in this example, both of the left and right lamps are turned off, left (I.e., only lighting, both lighting, left flashing, right lighting, or both flashing) is set, and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S816, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S817, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S818. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing a stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is output in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the modes corresponding to the respective jackpot types and the deviations set in the variable display setting process are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a control signal for performing the stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the decorative symbol display device 42, and the sub-display device 411 is reliably achieved. However, since the sub-control device 262 has already determined the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the symbol command or the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is returned. Need not be added. In addition, again, the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b is the main display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 42 is merely an auxiliary display (for production). I have.

  Subsequently, in step S819, after performing initial setting of the hit state and determination information setting processing for measuring the period of the time shortening mode, the variable interval timer is set to the variable interval period (for example, 1 second) in step S820. After setting the corresponding value, the present process ends. Here, the determination information setting process in step S819 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set to ON with reference to the hit / fail random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set to ON by taking into account the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, “16” is set in a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been opened) executed in the big hit state in step S1003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, when the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, in step S1005, “8” is set to the round number counter. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1007, a value “2000” corresponding to, for example, an opening period of 8 seconds is set to a special variable timer used for control during a winning state (opening / closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set. Subsequently, in step S1008, the maximum number of balls per round, ie, eight, is set to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first and second variable prize devices 32a and 32b. "8" shown is set. The value of the winning counter is determined by the first and second count switches 223a as to whether or not there is a ball in the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). 223b, and if it is determined that there is a ball in the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on a hit type and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1009, this processing ends.

  In addition, the effect of the promotion of the jackpot type in the jackpot state (for example, when the even-numbered eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the “8RS” or “16RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately afterward. May be taught, or, when the odd-numbered eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it may be taught that "16RS" was won during the immediately succeeding jackpot state). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by taking into account the random number storage area of the execution area of the special change suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1010 (a small hit), or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1004 ("2RS" or "2RN"), in step S1011 the round number counter indicates "2". Set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1013, a value “500” corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set in the special variable timer, and in step S1014, “8” is set in the winning counter, and in step S1015, the opening Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If neither the big hit nor the small hit is determined, and a negative determination is made in step S1010, in step S1016, it is determined whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, the time reduction mode is set. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1016, in step S1017, the value of the variation counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit state of “8RN”, “2RN30”, “2RN60”, and “2RN90”, the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time shortening mode is displayed on the fluctuation frequency counter. Is set, and each time the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1010.

  In a succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1018, in step S1019, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, the time reduction mode ends when the variable display is performed the specified number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1019, in a step S1020, a time-saving end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then the present process is ended. In the present embodiment, the process of performing the initial setting of the small hit state and the process of performing the initial setting of the large hit status of the 2RS and 2RN are shared, but may be performed separately.

  Next, a first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit status storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the big hit state and the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the state is not the big hit state or the small hit state, the present process is terminated as it is. By the way, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is set in the hit situation storage area in the above-described determination information setting processing.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the state is in the big hit state or the small hit state (when any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit state storage area), step S1202 is performed. , It is determined whether or not the first change flag is turned on in the execution area of the special change reservation area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1202, the process moves to step S1203, and the value of the special variable timer is decremented by one. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1206. In a succeeding step S1207, it is determined whether or not a payout is a big hit. Here, any one of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, which is a jackpot with a payout that can be awarded in the case of winning in a winning / non-winning lottery performed when a ball is entered into the first start winning device 33a. It is determined whether or not there is (other than “2RS”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the special variable timer is set to a value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for which the first variable winning device 32a is kept open. Set.

  After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process of opening the first variable prize device 32a is performed, and in step S1211, round information for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the round is performed. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether "3" is set in the hit status storage area. As will be described later in detail, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are finished and the ending period is started, “3” is set to the hit situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not time to end the big hit state or the small hit state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by one in step S1213.

  In a succeeding step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the flow shifts to step S1215 to set "1" in the hit status storage area. After that, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not the payout is a jackpot.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1217, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1218, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer.

  After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, the winning counter is set to “8”. Further, in step S1220, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of information to start an interval is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if there is a time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the first variable winning device 32a, the process proceeds to step S1222. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for counting the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is "0". At the start of the big hit state or the small hit state and at the start of the interval, the winning counter is set to “8” which is the upper limit (specified number) of wins per round. Then, each time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a, 1 is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if the end of the round has come without waiting for the elapse of the set period of the round, the flow shifts to step S1213. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round ends immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state have been completed, the flow shifts to step S1223 to set “3” in the hit situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot with a payout. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, in step S1225, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, in step S1226, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer.

  After step S1225 or step S1226, in step S1227, the winning counter is set to “7”. When the processing for setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” at the start of the ending period, in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination is made immediately in step S1222, and the ending period may be completed. Can not. Therefore, the ending period is completed by inserting a temporary numerical value (“7” in this example) other than “0” into the winning counter in step S1227. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

  After step S1227, in step S1228, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1229, an ending command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the information to start ending is set. . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is time to end the big hit state after the ending period has ended, the flow shifts to step S1230 to perform an end setting process. In the end setting process, the setting of the mode storage area and the setting of the variation counter are performed.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag has been set to ON by taking into account the random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1403. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the big hit state ends.

  In a succeeding step S1404, “90” is set to the fluctuation number counter. It should be noted that the change number counter indicates the change display for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping that. After step S1404, in step S1415, a time-saving start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1405 the CPU refers to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area and determines whether the 2RN90 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process moves to step S1403, as in the case where the 8RN flag is set to ON.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, "60" is set in the fluctuation count counter in step S1408, and the time saving start command is set in step S1415. Is set, and then the present process ends.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether the 2RN30 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, "30" is set in the fluctuation count counter in step S1411, and a time saving start command is set in step S1415. Is set, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether the 2RS flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, “22” is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent mode is provided after the big hit state ends. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latent start command notifying the start of the latent mode to the sub controller 262 is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, “21” is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the probable change mode is provided after the big hit state ends. After step S1414, in step S1417, a probable change start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the probable change mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, “0” indicating that the state is not the big hit state or the small hit state is set in the hit state storage area. After that, in step S1232, a hit end command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of information to end the big hit state or the small hit state is set, and then this processing ends. Note that the hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation counter set in the end setting process.

  Note that the second variable prize device control process in step S207 of the normal process (see FIG. 10) is basically the same as the first variable prize device control process, except that the opening / closing control target is the second variable prize device 32b. This is executed when the second fluctuation flag is set to ON, and only differs in that it is determined whether or not 16RS or 8RS when determining whether or not a jackpot with a payout is omitted. I do.

  Next, the normal display control processing in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary figure interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the ordinary figure interval period set after the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the current time is a general time interval period, in step S2102, the value of the general time interval timer is subtracted, and the process ends. That is, for example, assuming that the general time interval period is 1 second (1000 msec), “249” (“250” when the configuration in which step S2102 is performed before step S2101) is set in the general time interval timer. In this case, in the process, the value of the general-purpose interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec, and becomes “0” after one second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the current time is not within the ordinary symbol interval period, the ordinary symbol display flag indicating whether or not the variable symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is set in step S2103. It is determined whether the switch is on. It should be noted that, when the flag for displaying ordinary symbols is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2104 to determine whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the ordinary hold counter Nc is 0, the present process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variation display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is suspended, the present process is terminated as it is. For example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which variable display is not performed. It may be. In other words, after the fluctuation is stopped, the normal symbol display device 41 maintains the stop mode (in a mode indicating the result of the ball entry support lottery) during the general symbol interval period, but the general symbol interval period ends. Then, it may be configured to be able to switch to a display mode indicating that it is in the fluctuation standby state.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105.

  In a succeeding step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, and includes a first holding area → an execution area, a second holding area → The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as a reserved first area, a reserved third area → a reserved second area, a reserved fourth area → a reserved third area, and so on.

  After that, in step S2107, a variation display setting process for setting and starting the variation display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is executed.

  Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, a normal symbol display flag indicating that variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 is being performed is set to ON. In the following step S2302, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether or not the current state is other than the big hit state or the small hit state, by referring to the hit state storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither the big hit state nor the small hit state, it is determined in step S2303 whether a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area. That is, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state (time reduction mode or probability change mode).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, a change in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed with respect to a general symbol display timer that measures the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. "100" is set to make the display time 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high ball entry state, the winning is achieved when the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1 to 99”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball-starting support lottery for whether or not to open the second starting winning device 33b is won, it is determined in step S2306 that the ball-on-going support lottery has been won. Set the indicated ball entry support flag to ON. After step S2306, or when a positive determination is made in step S2305, the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in the case of the big hit state, the small hit state, or the low ball entry state, in step S2307, the ordinary symbol display timer is set to the normal symbol display timer. Is set to "2000" in order to make the variable display time of 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the ordinary fluctuation holding area is "1". In the low ball entry state, the winning is achieved when the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the player has won the ball entry support lottery, in step S2309, the player sets the ball entry support flag indicating that the player has won the ball entry support lottery. After step S2309, or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, the present process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display of the ordinary holding display device 44 (ordinary holding lamp 406) corresponding to the decrease of the number of held variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 by one. Perform processing. That is, when the pair of left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are both blinking, the right ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on while the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is blinking, and the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is blinking. When both right and left ordinary holding lamps 406 are on, the left and right ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned on. When both right and left ordinary holding lamps 406 are on, the left ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on. Is turned on, the right-side ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned off. If the left-side ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned on and the right-side ordinary holding lamp 406 is turned off, both the right and left ordinary holding lamps 406 are turned off. Perform a process for causing After step S2108, this process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if variable display is being performed on the ordinary symbol display device 41, the flow advances to step S2109 to perform a process of subtracting the ordinary symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110 to determine whether or not the count value of the general-purpose display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the ordinary figure display flag is turned off in step S2111, and ordinary figure stop display setting for performing stop display on the ordinary symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when the winning is achieved (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), both the pair of left and right general-purpose lamps 405 are turned on, and when the ball is off, only the left general-purpose lamp 405 is turned on. Let it.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2113 to perform a general-purpose map discrimination information setting process. Here, the ordinary figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402 a normal variable flag for determining whether the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not either “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the open time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 4 in response to the ordinary variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b. Set “1000” to seconds.

  Further, in step S2405, "3" is set in the opening number counter for counting the number of times (remaining number) of opening the second start winning device 33b so as to open the second start winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, in step S2408, the incoming ball support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag during the support period is turned on. Further, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the ordinary variable timer. Set “100”. Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set in the opening counter to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state. This processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to a general-purpose interval period (for example, one second) is set in the general-purpose interval timer, and then the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, the switching display for continuously performing the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (the switching display in which the pair of left and right general-purpose lamps 405 are alternately turned on). Make settings. In addition, based on the setting content of the switching display setting, in the next external output processing in the normal processing, a control signal for performing switching display to the ordinary symbol display device 41 is output. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Further, in step S2116, the lighting mode of the ordinary holding display device 44 (ordinary holding lamp 406) (in this example, of the pair of left and right lamps, both light off, light on only left, light on both, light on right with light on left, and light on both) After performing the setting for maintaining either of them, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the start winning device control processing in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag during the support period is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2201, in step S2202, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the ordinary variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second starting winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the flow shifts to step S2205 to turn off the ordinary variable flag. In a succeeding step S2206, the value of the number-of-openings counter is decremented by 1, and in a step S2207, the setting of closing the second start winning device 33b is performed.

  After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball support lottery that has been won has been performed in the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, and based on this, the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. If there is the remaining number of times, a value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the interval time is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is an interval period during which the second startup winning device 33b is opened three times (the second startup winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the ordinary variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value (“1000” in this example) corresponding to the open time is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then the present process ends.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interruption process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interruption process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily suspended, and a reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored. The command reception flag is turned on, and the reception interruption processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received. If the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may shift to a command determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, a main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power was turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to step S3115 and subsequent steps to initialize the RAM 513. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, an initial value of the RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the flow shifts to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (when power-off is restored) Process). That is, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored in step S3109, the information of the occurrence of the power cut is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of the prize ball is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interruption is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the processing in step S3122 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power-off. In the power failure process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Then, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area. In step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a. In step S3127, the RAM determination value is calculated and the backup area 513a is calculated. And the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 513 to be backed up.

  In the process of step S3122, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than in the case where each process is in progress. Less and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before the power is turned off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so that the state can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, a timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and the command is determined (step S3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from main controller 261 and the process ends. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  In steps S3304 to S3306, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not the command is a payout return command. In step S3306, whether or not the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not it is.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has been already turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S 3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S 3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout of the prize ball is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. Can be prevented from occurring. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be set reliably.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, this command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the clearing of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) are performed while the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not performed when the winning ball remains. Although a bad effect is caused and a loss is given to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent a loss from being given to the player.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is the payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was turned off. A payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to permit the payout of the prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, the processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Be updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a winning ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received winning ball number is added to the total winning ball number and stored. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the winning ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the winning ball number corresponding to the command to the total winning ball number stored in a predetermined buffer area. And memorize. Since payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball commands transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball commands are payout instruction commands for instructing payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out earlier than the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, the processing based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Be updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO) nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor is it a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. Upon completion of the command determination processing, in step S3202, it is determined whether the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination processing. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout of payout balls before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, firing permission is set in the firing control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this processing, when the state return switch 321 is pressed down at the time of a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 358a, the payout motor 358a is rotated forward and reverse to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state). It is planned.

  After that, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full state detection switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set. When the lower plate is no longer full, the lower plate full release state is set. Execute the setting of. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (ball out state) or tank ball absence release state (ball presence state) is executed according to a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence switch is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and the tank ball absence state and the tank ball absence state are set. Execute the settings.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a state to be notified such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the state is notified.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of the prize ball and the lending ball is executed. More specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to determine that the ball is not in the ball-pulling disabled state and that the ball-pulling operation is not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball-pulling process. In a succeeding step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the start of the timer interrupt processing.

  Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, a port corresponding to a command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not a command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 includes a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all storage areas, the command is stored at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

  In the following step S3903, a pending information storage process for storing the information of the advanced command output from the main control device 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. The advance command includes, as described above, information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is a variable display triggered by a ball, and variable information corresponding to a jackpot. The information includes information indicating presence, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

  The hold information storage area of the sub-control device 262 has a first hold information storage area and a second hold information storage region each including four hold areas (hold first to fourth hold areas), similarly to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. It has a pending information storage area and one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a big hit has been made, a big hit type, a small hit, or the like, according to the reception history of the advanced command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable hold area). Information on whether or not information is displayed and information (variation information) relating to a variable display such as a reach type are stored in chronological order. Further, in the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in a time-series manner in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information relating to the first variation display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and the second variable display represented by the ball entered the second startup winning device 33b The four pieces of variation information can be held and stored. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area. .

  Hereinafter, the suspension information storage processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined in step S4102 whether the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the entry of the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation reservation area), the process proceeds to step S4103. Then, the first change holding counter Nd that counts the number of change information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In the following step S4104, the information of the jackpot, the information of the jackpot type, the information of the small jackpot, the information of the reach type and the like included in the advance command are stored in the vacant holding area of the first holding information storage area. Store it in the first area.

  In subsequent step S4105, a notice information storing process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect display related to each other is intentionally derived in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are obtained, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information storage. The change information is stored in the newly reserved area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 49, reaches an upper limit value (ie, 49), and then returns to a lower limit value of 0. The continuous notice counter is updated periodically, and each time the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer).

  The notice type counter is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 9 and, after reaching an upper limit (that is, 9), returns to 0 as a lower limit. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  Then, in the notice information storing process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is derived is provided in each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice approval / disapproval determination table that is considered when determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice, and a notice table that is considered when determining the mode of the continuous notice. There are provided a plurality of advance notice propriety determination tables and advance notice tables, and the advance notice propriety decision table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the fluctuation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement is performed. In the present embodiment, the continuous announcement lottery process in step S4106 forms the specific effect determination process.

  In the continuous announcement lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable suspension counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous advance counter newly stored in the first suspension information storage area, It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement by referring to the announcement success / failure determination table corresponding to each of the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode. Further, when it is determined that the continuous announcement is to be executed, the announcement table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode is based on the value of the announcement type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. To determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous advance flags of all the reserved areas in which the variation information is stored among the reserved areas in the first reserved information storage area are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  After step S4106, in step S4107, a holding icon setting process for additionally displaying one holding icon indicating that the variable display is held is stored in the lower left portion (holding display area) of the decorative symbol display device 42. After performing this, the processing is terminated. A plurality of patterns are prepared as display patterns such as the mode of the hold icon and how to show the mode (the mode changes in the middle). Furthermore, the display pattern of the hold icon is associated with the winning expectation (big hit expectation) for the occurrence of the jackpot state, and the display pattern of the hold icon indicates the jackpot expectation (a pre-reading hold announcement effect is performed). It is configured as follows.

  That is, in the hold icon setting process, the value of the icon lottery random number counter (for example, 0 to 199) used in determining the display pattern of the hold icon is acquired, and the hold of the corresponding hold area in the hold information storage area is performed. Referring to a reserved icon pattern storage table that stores the correspondence between the value of the icon lottery random number counter and the display pattern of the reserved icon, the icon lottery random number counter stored in the reserved icon storage area is stored. The display pattern of the hold icon is determined based on the value. The reserved icon pattern storage table is for a jackpot that is taken into account in accordance with the fluctuation information that teaches a jackpot, a front-and-back one that is taken into account in accordance with the fluctuation information that leads to a back-and-forth outreach, and other than the front-and-back outage. There are two types, one for departure other than before and after that is taken into account in accordance with the fluctuation information to be reached, and the other (completely departure), and a reserved icon pattern storage table referred to according to the fluctuation information included in the preceding command Is selected. Then, a process is performed in which the reserved icons of the determined display pattern are displayed such that the reserved icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 are arranged on the right side of the rightmost one of the reserved icons.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hold icon corresponds to either the first variable display based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a or the second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b. This is a common mode in which it is not specified whether the operation is performed. In addition, if the transition of the lighting mode of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b (the first hold lamp 403 and the second hold lamp 404) has been confirmed, it is determined which of the start winning devices 33a and 33b is used. It is possible to determine whether the display is a variable display based on the entry of a game ball.

  In addition, when the determination is affirmative in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to the entry into the second starting winning device 33b (the fluctuation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area), The process advances to step S4108 to increment the second variable suspension counter Ne that counts the number of suspensions of the variation information that is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area by one.

  After that, in step S4109, the information of the jackpot, the information of the jackpot type, the information of the small jackpot, the information of the reach type, etc. included in the advanced command are stored in the vacant holding area of the second holding information storage area. In the first area. In a succeeding step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are obtained, and the counter values are stored in the second reserved information storage area in the reserved area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in the above step S4109.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous announcement lottery process for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement is performed. Note that the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4111 only makes the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4106 correspond to the ball entry into the second start winning device 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted. After step S4111, in step S4112, a hold icon setting process is performed, and the process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process shifts to step S3904 to determine whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from the time. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the flow shifts to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the flow shifts to step S3914.

  In step S3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying the decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the large hit decoration symbol counter CO and the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting each of the off symbol of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR have a configuration in which register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is for determining a symbol (jackpot symbol) when the decoration symbol display device 42 stops changing when a jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is used as the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO. Has nine (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 8 and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

  When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 indicates that the symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot is stopped, for example, the counter value is determined based on a table (not shown) (table for associating the counter value with the decorative symbol). If it is 0, the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined, such as "1" (the slotted pattern), and if it is 1, "2" (the slotted pattern). The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol buffer of the RAM 553. However, the counter value is not stored in the buffer but is referred to at a timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  When the symbol command indicates that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, the counter value is "2" (the slot), and if the counter value is 2 to 4, the counter value is "4". The combination of the big hit symbols is determined such as "6" (twisted eye) for 5, 6 and "6" (twisted eye) for 7, 8 and so on.

  Each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determines a combination of each of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / losing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are updated at random by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of the addition exceeds the upper limit, the current value is determined by subtracting 8 from the value. . The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is determined by the reach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than the offset, and the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. It is stored in any of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the updating process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the middle symbol counter CM is to be updated (YES in step S4002), the flow advances to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. If the lower symbol counter CR is updated (NO in steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap. There is no. Thus, every time the update process is performed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated.

  Then, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol combination (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is determined whether or not the combination of the big hit symbols (the symbol in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbol in the middle symbol display area are the same). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the process ends without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front and back (reach out of front and back) (S4008: YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. This is stored in the out-of-reach symbol buffer, and the process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviations (reach other than front and rear deviations) (S4008: NO), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and rear departures, and the processing is terminated.

  When the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (S4006: NO), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at this time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3906, a suspension process is performed. Hereinafter, the suspension processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether the value of the second fluctuation holding counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored in a suspended state, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the second variable display is digested with priority over the first variable display, and if the second variable display is held and stored, the first variable display is digested. Never. That is, when the change information of the second variable display is stored in the second hold information storage area, the change pattern command corresponding to the first variable display is not sent. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether the value of the second fluctuation holding counter Ne is greater than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command has the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is held is determined. Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information indicating which of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display corresponds to the fluctuation information, and based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation pattern command is used for the first fluctuation display and the first fluctuation display. Which variation information of the second variation display may be determined.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first hold information storage area is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data (including a continuous notice flag) stored in the first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area toward the execution area, and The data in each area is shifted such as → execution area, second hold area → first hold area, third hold area → second hold area, fourth hold area → third hold area, and so on. After step S4204, the process moves to step S4207.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if at least one piece of change information of the second change display is held and stored, in step S4205, the value of the second change holding counter Ne is decremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S4206, a process of shifting data stored in the second hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the hold in the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → first hold area, third hold area → second hold area, fourth hold area → third hold area, and so on. After step S4206, the process moves to step S4207. In the present embodiment, the number of execution areas of the hold information storage area is one, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the data. Are shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for the continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting processing of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery processing of step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON. Is not performed, and thus the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, it is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command whether the jackpot is a jackpot, what kind is a jackpot, and if not a jackpot, what is the reach type. The type of the continuous announcement is determined with reference to the corresponding tables. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at a desired timing when displaying the corresponding fluctuation.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, a reserved icon shift process for shifting the reserved icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. In addition, each hold area of the hold information storage area and the execution area are provided with a hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon, and information on the hold icon is also stored in the hold information storage area described above. The data is shifted by the data shift processing. The suspension icon shift process is a process for redrawing the suspension icon according to the data shift. In the decorative symbol display device 42, the leftmost icon is displayed every time one variable display is consumed (executed). Is deleted, and the holding icon arranged on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display location is moved).

  After step S4208, this process ends. In the present embodiment, the second variable display is prioritized over the first variable display. Therefore, when continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variable displays, the first variable display is used. If there is a ball in the second start-up prize device 33b during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may interrupt the plurality of first variable displays, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an effect used as a continuous announcement is a display effect that can be derived even during a normal fluctuation display when the continuous announcement is not performed (an effect that can be derived for a single fluctuation display). Is used. Therefore, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, no uncomfortable feeling occurs.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, based on information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generation of a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the fluctuation type, the fluctuation time, the stop symbol, and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45 is performed.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a decorative display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. It should be noted that once a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is operated in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. Is continuously displayed.

  In addition, when the variation display is started, when the continuous announcement flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous announcement lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is determined based on the variation information of the variation pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of a notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Further, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process of performing an effect control during a big hit or a small hit (hit display process) is also performed.

  Here, the hit display processing performed in the display setting processing in step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether an opening command notifying the start of the big hit state or the small hit state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702 a round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to “16” if “16RS” based on information included in the opening command. Set “8” for “8RS” and “8RN”, and set “2” for “2RS”, “2RN” and “small hit”.

  After that, in step S4703, in the case of a jackpot with a payout, an opening effect for 8 seconds is set (image of the decorative design display device 42, sound of the speaker SP, lighting mode of various lamps), and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores a correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effect modes in the jackpot state, and refers to the table to determine a corresponding effect. Select it and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a payout with a jackpot, an effect during a round of up to 30 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by one in step S4707, and if a large hit with a ball is hit in step S4708, the effect is set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by one in step S4710, and if the hit is a big hit in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, followed by terminating the present process.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot or a small hit other than a jackpot with a payout, an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period ( The effect is not set for each period such as 1 second, but is set so that the effect (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713 the ending display is immediately terminated, and setting is made to set the mode to the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, after step S3907, in step S3908, a process (sub-display device setting process) for controlling lighting of the sub-display device 411 (sub-lamp 417) of the composite display device unit 40 is performed. Here, the sub display device setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7101, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 261. If a negative determination is made in step S7101, it is determined in step S7102 whether the sub-lamp fluctuation flag indicating that the sub-display device 411 is performing fluctuation display (while the sub-lamp 417 being switched on is being displayed) is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main control device 261.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, that is, if a fluctuation pattern command is received, in step S7104, the fluctuation information of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special figure lamps 401 and 402) included in the fluctuation pattern command is stored. Perform the following processing.

  In the following step S7105, a process for starting the variation display of the sub display device 411 (variation start process of the sub lamp 417) is performed. In the variation start process of the sub lamp 417, the variation pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined based on the variation information of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and in the present embodiment, the mode of the sub lamp 417 according to the determined variation pattern is derived. It is supposed to.

  The display mode of the composite display device unit 40 will be described. For example, when the variable display of the first special display device 43a is performed, the display is constituted by the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides of the first special figure lamp 401. A series of lighting modes is derived by 14 LEDs (hereinafter, also referred to as “first variation display LEDs”) arranged in 2 columns × 7 columns. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46A, a lighting (fluctuation) pattern in which the lit LEDs are sequentially lit in a clockwise direction, and as shown in FIG. There is a lighting (fluctuation) pattern in which light is sequentially turned on from the left end to the right end, then turned on sequentially from the left end to the right end of the lower row, and turned on again from the left end to the right end of the upper row.

  However, in the variation display of the first special display device 43a, at least one of the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub lamps 417 (first variation display LEDs) arranged on the left and right thereof are turned on. It is assumed that one special figure lamp 401 is turned on. That is, in the present embodiment, two of the first variable display LEDs are configured to be simultaneously turned on, and both light modes are changed in the same manner (one light mode). Is configured to follow the mode of the other light), and when one of the sub lamps 417 among the first variation display LEDs is lit, one of the first special figure lamps 401 is also lit. It has become. It should be noted that a state occurs in which two first special figure lamps 401 among the first variation display LEDs are lit, and none of the sub lamps 417 are lit.

  For example, when the variable display of the second special display device 43b is performed, the second special figure lamp 402 and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides of the second special figure lamp 402 are arranged in two columns by seven columns. A series of lighting modes is derived by the 14 LEDs (hereinafter, also referred to as “second variation display LEDs”). The variable display of the second special display device 43b is also controlled so as to be controlled in the same manner as the variable display of the first special display device 43a.

  In other words, in step S7105, it is determined whether the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and which of the two variation patterns of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 is used. By determining whether or not there is a sub-lamp control table, a sub-lamp control table that is referred to when the lighting control of the sub-lamp 417 is performed when the variable display is performed is selected. It should be noted that a fluctuation specifying flag indicating which of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display is provided may be provided, and the setting processing of the fluctuation specifying flag may be performed in step S7105.

  In the present embodiment, the normal processing of the main control device 261 is performed every 4 msec, and the normal processing of the sub-display device 262 is performed every 2 msec. While one signal is sent to 402, two signals are sent to the corresponding sub-lamp 417 (in the sub-lamp control table, the same signal is repeatedly output twice). It is configured.

  After step S7105, in step S7106, the sub lamp variation flag is set to ON. In the following step S7107, a covering shutter position setting process for determining the arrangement of the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) is performed. As the arrangement pattern of the covering shutter 441, of the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443, both are at the covering position, both are at the exposure position, and the first shutter 442 is at the covering position. There is a pattern in which the second shutter 443 is in the exposure position, and a pattern in which the first shutter 442 is in the exposure position and the second shutter 443 is in the covering position. In the present embodiment, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are basically set to the exposure positions during the first variable display and the second variable display, and in the step S7107, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter When it is determined that the second shutter 443 is displaced to the covering position, the first shutter 442 or the second shutter 443 corresponding to the stop display of the first variable display and the second variable display is moved to the covering position. It is configured to be displaced.

  After step S7107, in step S7108, a process of determining a stop display pattern of the sub lamp 417 (sub lamp stop pattern setting process) is executed. As described above, the stop state of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is determined by the lighting pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 (the lighting state of the lit special figure lamps 401 and 402). Combination), it is configured to teach that each of the big hit types or small hits that have been won, or that it is out of the way, and a stop mode (lighting pattern) indicating each item ) Are also prepared in a plurality of patterns. For example, with respect to the first special display device 43a, eight patterns of patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that "16RS" has been won, and eight patterns of patterns 1 to 8 have been obtained as patterns indicating that "8RS" has been won. Patterns are prepared, eight patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that “2S” has been won, and eight patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that “8RN” has been won. Eight patterns from pattern 1 to pattern 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that a "win" has been won, and 32 patterns from pattern 1 to pattern 32 are prepared as patterns indicating "out".

  That is, the fluctuation information of the special display devices 43a and 43b included in the fluctuation pattern command includes not only information on which of the two fluctuation patterns of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, but also Information on the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 is also included.

  The sub control device 262 is provided with a plurality of sub lamp pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417. Further, for example, when the stop pattern of the first special display device is a pattern 1 to pattern 4 indicating that “16RS” has been won, the first sub lamp pattern determination table is referred to, and the stop pattern of the first special display device is referred to. In the case of the pattern 5 to the pattern 8 indicating that "16RS" has been won, the second sub-lamp pattern determination table is referred to and the patterns 1 to 1 indicating that the stop pattern of the first special display device is "out". In the case of the pattern 8, the stop pattern of the first special display device is associated with the referenced sub-lamp pattern determination table, such as referring to the first sub-lamp pattern determination table.

  In step S7108, a sub lamp pattern determination table to be referred to is determined according to the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, and the sub lamp pattern determination table is referred to. The value of the sub-ramp-pattern determination random number counter used when determining the stop pattern of the sub-ramp 417 is obtained, and the stop pattern of the sub-ramp 417 is determined based on the value of the sub-ramp pattern determination random number counter.

  In the present embodiment, after the arrangement of the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) is determined, the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined (that is, the lighting is performed when the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined). It is necessary to consider the arrangement of the covering shutter 441 so that the sub-lamp 417 is not hidden by the covering shutter 441), for example, after determining the stop pattern of the sub-lamp 417, The arrangement of the covering shutter 441 may be determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the stop mode of the first variation display LED (second variation display LED) looks the same, the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 (second special figure lamp 402) is changed. May be different. That is, FIG. 45A in which the first shutter 442 is in the covering position and the second shutter 443 is in the exposed position, and FIG. 45 (A) in which the first shutter 442 is in the exposed position and the second shutter 443 is in the covering position. In b), the mode of the LED that is turned on among the first variable display LEDs that are visible is the same (in the visible range of the first variable display LEDs, both are at the leftmost position). The upper and lower rows of the column, the upper row of the third row from the left, the lower row of the fourth row from the left, the upper row of the fifth row from the left, and the upper and lower rows of the rightmost row are lit. The lighting combination of the diagram lamp 401 is different.

  Therefore, the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 as the first mode shown in FIG. 45A corresponds to “8RS” as the first result, and the second mode shown in FIG. 45B. The stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 as described above corresponds to “8RN” as the second result. When visually recognizing the first composite mode and the second composite mode in which each stop pattern of the diagram lamp 401 and the stop pattern of the sub-lamp 417 are combined, the appearance may be seemingly similar. . That is, the display position (combination of the lit special figure lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417) in which the lighting mode of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 are combined is different. In addition, the display form (the form that emerges by the lit LED) can be derived from the same form.

  The open / close state of the variable winning device 43 in the jackpot state of “8RS” and “8RN”, that is, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the end condition of each round are the same. Further, for teaching or suggesting that "8RS" has been won (corresponding to the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b for teaching that "8RS" has been won / performed in synchronization). In the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, it was determined not to teach that "8RS" was won but to teach (indicate) that either "8RS" or "8RN" was won. The variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the case is the same as the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 that teaches that "8RN" has been won. In addition, the effect on the decorative pattern display device 42 in the jackpot state performed in a state where it is not taught whether “8RS” or “8RN” is basically the same (actually, in the jackpot state, “ "Upgrade production" that teaches that the player has won the "8RS" is performed, and if the production succeeds, that is, if the instruction that "8RS" is given is performed, then a different aspect will be used. Become). In addition, when it is not taught whether “8RS” or “8RN” even at the end of the jackpot state, the display form of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the subsequent normal game may be the same.

  After step S7108, in step S7109, the determined stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is stored, and then the present process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if a stop command is received from main controller 261, in step S7110, sub lamp 417 is stopped in the stop pattern determined in step S7108 and stored in step S7109. Perform stop display processing to be displayed. As a result, the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 of the main display device 49 and the corresponding sub lamp 417 are stopped and displayed in synchronization.

  After step S7110, the sub-ramp fluctuation flag is turned off in step S7111, the teaching timer is set in step S7112, and the process ends. The in-teaching timer is for the main control device 261 to grasp on the sub-control device 262 the fluctuation interval period set after the stop display of the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and in step S7112, A value corresponding to the length of the fluctuation interval (for example, one second) is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, in step S7113, the variable display of the sub-display device 411 performed following the variable display of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b is continued. To perform a switching display setting process. In other words, the pointer of the sub lamp control table is moved forward by one, and the processing instructed there, that is, the processing of turning on the corresponding one of the sub lamps 417 and extinguishing the others is performed. After step S7113, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7103, it is determined in step S7141 whether the value of the teaching timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S7114, the value of the teaching timer is decremented by one in step S7115, and the process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7114, in step S7161, the display mode of the sub-display device 411 (the lighting pattern of the sub-lamp 417) is set to the standby state (the fluctuation of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b). Standby display setting is performed to set a display mode corresponding to (a state in which display is not performed).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, in the state where the variable display of the second special display device 43b (the first special display device 43a) is not performed, the second special figure lamp 402 (the first special figure) is used. As the standby display on the lamp 401) side, the rightmost and second from the right in the lower row of the second special figure lamp 402 (first special figure lamp 401) are turned on. On the other hand, in the state where the variable display of the second special display device 43b (the first special display device 43a) is not performed, as the standby display on the sub lamp 417 side, among the sub lamps 417, the variable display is not performed. The sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right of the second special display device 43b (the first special display device 43a) are turned off.

  After step S7116, in step S7117, the position of the covering shutter is reset (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are displaced to the exposure positions), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, the sub display device 411 constitutes a sub display unit, and the switching display on the sub display device 411 corresponds to a pseudo display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3908, in step S3909, menu display processing is performed. In the present embodiment, the top menu screen can be opened by operating the effect button 125 in a state where the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is not performed. Various selection items such as "game history" and "volume setting" are displayed on the top menu screen, and selection can be appropriately determined by operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126.

  In the subsequent lamp setting process of step S3910, a lighting pattern of lamps and electric decorations is set so as to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the audio setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in synchronization with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. If a command related to voice, such as notification of an error occurrence, has been transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3911.

  In step S3912, the control setting of a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed while the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed; energy saving mode) and the like Is performed.

  In step S3913, an external output process of transmitting a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3912 to each device is executed. For example, the display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3913 performed every 2 msec, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process shifts to step S3914 to determine whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Is determined. The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

  If power-off information has not been stored, the process advances to step S3915 to determine whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 has not been destroyed, the process returns to step S3901, and the normal process is repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3916. In the power-off processing, the generation of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After the power-off processing is performed, the processing is in an infinite loop.

  As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the left and right of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special figure lamps 401 and 402) which are controlled by the main control device 261 and perform variable display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery are performed. Is controlled by the sub-control device 262, and the start and end timings are synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (the switching display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402) (not related to the result of the winning / rejection lottery). ) A sub-display device 411 (sub-lamp 417) for performing variable display is provided.

  Furthermore, the sub lamp 417 constituting the sub display device 411 uses the same product LED as the special figure lamps 401 and 402 constituting the special display devices 43a and 43b. A display mode similar to the display by 401 and 402 is obtained. Therefore, of the display modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special view lamps 401 and 402) and the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417), the display modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special view lamps 401 and 402) are shown. This makes it difficult to understand what is happening, and thus makes it difficult to understand the pattern of the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (the special figure lamps 401 and 402) (making it difficult to make an instant determination).

  Therefore, for example, while visually recognizing the stop display pattern (contents taught by) of the special display devices 43a and 43b, a player who attempts to play a game efficiently based on such information and the special display device 43a, A player who does not know the stop display pattern (contents taught) of the stop display 43b, or wants to enjoy the effects of the decorative design display device 42 and the like, so that the special display devices 43a and 43b are not visually recognized. It is possible to minimize the difference in the game result between the players (for example, the difference in the game balls finally obtained). In other words, the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b gains, and the player who does not visually recognize the special display devices 43a and 43b relatively loses. It is possible to suppress such a situation. As a result, the pattern of the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be grasped, and the consciousness of losing the special display devices 43a and 43b can be suppressed unless the special display devices 43a and 43b are visually recognized. You can have them fully enjoy the production display.

  Further, in order to make the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b difficult to understand, the variable display is performed by the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) controlled by the sub control device 262. Therefore, for example, in order to make the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b difficult to understand, the stop display of the main display device 49 is made more complicated (for example, the number of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 is increased, As compared with the case where the stop display patterns of the lamps 401 and 402 are increased, the control load of the main control device 261 can be reduced, and the main display device 49 can be simplified.

  In addition, the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) is provided on the left and right of the main display device 49 so as to sandwich the main display device 49 (special display devices 43a and 43b), and configures each of the special display devices 43a and 43b. The upper and lower rows of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 in the upper and lower two rows are respectively shifted left and right by one lamp, and the space formed by the shift of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 is determined. Also, the sub lamp 417 is arranged. Therefore, the display modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the display mode of the sub-display device 411 become more complicated. Therefore, the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b is instantaneously displayed (stop display is displayed) from the entire display mode configured by the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the display mode of the sub-display device 411. (During that time) it can be more difficult to recognize and understand the pattern of the stop display.

  Further, the main control device 261 is configured to be able to output information on the fluctuation pattern and the stop pattern of the special display devices 43a and 43b to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 performs the sub display device based on the information. The variation pattern and the stop pattern of 411 are determined. Thereby, the display mode of the sub display device 411 can be matched with the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b. In the present embodiment, fourteen LEDs composed of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 and the sub lamp 417 adjacent thereto are switched and displayed so as to light in a predetermined order. In addition to the variable display, the range of the pattern selected from the plurality of patterns of the stop display of the sub-display device 411 is limited to some extent (narrowed down) according to the result of the win / fail lottery (big hit type or the like). It has become. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display device 411 is more effectively combined with the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b to derive a more apparent display, and the stop mode of the sub display device 411 is changed to the special display device. In combination with the stop modes of 43a and 43b, a predetermined meaningful display can be derived.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display pattern of the sub-display device 411 (the lighting of the sub-lamp 417) is different from the stop display pattern of the special display devices 43a and 43b (the lighting pattern of the special-purpose lamps 401 and 402). (See FIG. 45) when combined with the pattern (see FIG. 45). In particular, in the present embodiment, the lighting pattern of the special lamp 401 is combined with the lighting pattern of the sub lamp 417, though the teaching is that the lighting pattern is "8RS" and "8RN", respectively. In some cases, the display mode may be the same as the display mode, and the display mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 may be the same. In this case, it is not possible to grasp which of “8RS” and “8RN” only by visually recognizing the decorative symbol display device 42. The only way is to grasp the stop pattern of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b (the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402). However, as described above, it is difficult to instantaneously determine the stop pattern of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b even when the composite display device unit 40 is visually recognized, and accordingly, “8RS” and , Or “8RN”. Thereby, the timing at which the content that has been determined is taught can be postponed as much as possible, and various effects can be derived during that time, and the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is more difficult to understand. As a result, the effect of suppressing unfairness due to knowledge and the like and having the user enjoy the effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 and the like is further enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the covering position that covers a part (four sub lamps 417 arranged in the vertical direction) of the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 (the first sub display device 411a and the second sub display device 411b), A cover shutter 441 (a first shutter 442 and a second shutter 443) that can be displaced between an exposure position that exposes the part of the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 is provided. The displacement of the covering shutter 441 changes the visible range of the sub-display device 411 (sub-lamp 417), and is configured by the display modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the display mode of the sub-display device 411. Can be changed completely. For example, FIG. 45A shows a mode in which the lamps to be turned on among the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right thereof are shifted to the right one by one from FIG. 45B. However, by displacing the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) in accordance with the difference in the light emission mode, a pattern is estimated from the unlit sub lamp 417 from the (margin). Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and to grasp the stop display.

  In addition, since the special display devices 43a and 43b and the sub-display device 411 perform the variable display by changing the lighting mode of each of the plurality of LEDs, for example, the special display devices 43a and 43b and Simplification of control and the like are achieved as compared with the case where the sub-display device 411 is formed of a liquid crystal display device, and the degree of freedom in design is improved as compared with the case where the sub-display device 411 is formed of a segment display device. Further, although the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are arranged in a complicated manner as described above, they are arranged in a matrix as a whole, so that the design is improved and the special figure lamps are improved. The function and effect that the boundary between the lamps 401 and 402 and the sub-lamp 417 becomes difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  The main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 are mounted on the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411. Each of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 has a plurality of insertion holes 422 into which LEDs such as special figure lamps 401 and 402 can be inserted. The front surfaces of the substrates of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 are attached to the rear surface side of the panel 421 in a contact state. Therefore, the mounting panel 421 can position the substrates of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411. Therefore, the LEDs of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411, that is, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides thereof can be installed on the same plane without displacement. Compared with the case where the lamps are shifted, the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 can be hardly distinguished.

  Further, the boundary between the substrate of the main display device 49 and the substrate of the sub-display device 411 can be made difficult to understand by the mounting panel 421. Therefore, the distinction between the special lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 can be made more difficult.

  In addition, the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are arranged in a matrix as a whole, and in the first variable display and the second variable display, a regular lighting mode is set for the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417. The first and second variable displays have a better appearance (become natural), as compared with a case where the light is turned only by the special figure lamps 401 and 402, for example. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the division between the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417, and to make it difficult to understand the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b when the special display devices 43a and 43b stop changing. It will be played more reliably.

  Further, when at least one of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is turned on during the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the corresponding special figure lamps 401 and 402 (during the variable display). At least one is turned on. Thus, it is possible to reliably indicate that the special display devices 43a and 43b are performing variable display.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the above embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

  (A) In the above embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal hold display device 44, and The arrangement and number of the LEDs constituting the sub display device 411 are not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamps 417, and the like are arranged in a matrix, but may be arranged in a radial pattern as shown in FIG. In addition, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamps 417, and the like are arranged at equal intervals, but may be arranged so that the intervals are partially different (parts that are not close to each other may exist). . Furthermore, the structure of the composite display device unit 40 (the mounting structure of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411, etc.) is not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, one main display device 49 (control board) and two sub-display devices 411 (control board) are mounted on the mounting panel 421. The control panel may be constituted by a plurality of control boards, and these may be attached to the attachment panel 421, respectively. Further, for example, in the above embodiment, the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are mounted on the mounting panel 421, but the mounting panel 421 is omitted and the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are mounted on the base member 431. It is good also as being attached to. The shape, material, hue and the like of the mounting panel 421 are not particularly limited. For example, the mounting panel 421 may be made of an opaque resin. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the composite display device unit 40 is attached to the game board 30, but may be attached to the inner frame 12 or the front frame set 14.

  Further, the display devices provided collectively in the composite display device unit 40 are not particularly limited. For example, the normal symbol display device 41 and the normal hold display device 44 are appropriately changed for each model, such as being provided in another member. It is possible. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the sub-display device 411 are configured by a plurality of LEDs, but may be configured by another display device. For example, three same segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as a first sub-display device, a first special display device, and a second sub-display device from the left, and the first sub-display device can cover the first sub-display device. One shutter and a second shutter capable of covering the second sub-display device may be provided. When this configuration is employed, when the first shutter is at the covering position and the second shutter is at the exposure position, “1” is displayed on the first special display device, and is displayed on the second sub-display device. When “3” is displayed, and when the first shutter is at the exposure position and the second shutter is at the covering position, “1” is displayed on the first sub display device, and is displayed on the first special display device. In both cases where "3" is displayed, the same number "13" is displayed.

  In addition, for example, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the sub-display device 411 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device or a rotating body (reel, cube, or the like) having identification information attached to the outer peripheral surface.

  (B) In the above embodiment, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are applied as targets to which the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 is additionally provided. Alternatively or additionally, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a sub-lamp 417 is provided corresponding to the ordinary symbol display device 41 (ordinary symbol lamp 405) to start and stop the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 41. At that time, the main control device 261 is configured to output the information to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-lamp 417 is lit up in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (general-purpose lamp 405). May be configured. Further, a sub lamp 417 is provided corresponding to the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406), and the main control device 261 notifies the sub control device 262 when the lighting mode of the normal hold display device 44 is changed. The sub lamp 417 may be configured to be output so as to be lit and displayed in synchronization with the change of the lighting mode of the normal hold display device 44.

  When these configurations are employed, it is difficult to determine whether or not the ball entry support lottery has been won based on the appearance of the ordinary symbol display device 41, or how many variable displays of the ordinary symbol display device 41 are suspended. Or it may take a long time to determine whether or not it is. Therefore, by visually recognizing the composite display device unit 40 (normal symbol display device 41), the opening timing of the second start winning device 33b (the blade member 37) is measured, and the game ball is efficiently entered into the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to make the act of making the act difficult, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which there is a difference (in terms of the number of game balls to be finally obtained) with a player who does not carry out the act.

  When this configuration is adopted, the normal symbol display device 41 corresponds to the main display device, and the normal hold display device 44 corresponds to the hold display device. Further, a sub lamp 417 may be provided corresponding to the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) or the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404). In this case, the first suspension display device 46a and the second suspension display device 46b correspond to suspension display means.

  (C) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a first special display device 43a, a second special display device 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, a first hold display device 46a, a second hold display device 46b, a normal hold. A decoration device that is controlled by the sub-control device 262 so as to be adjacent to one of the display device 44 and the sub-display device 411, and that performs a decoration display corresponding to (interlocked with) the variable display of the decoration symbol display device 42; Also, a plurality of decorative lamps 461 (LEDs of the same product as the special figure lamps 401 and 402) may be provided as decorative display means. That is, during the first variable display, the variable display (switching display) is performed by the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub lamps 417 on both left and right sides thereof, and the decorative lamp 461 is lit in a predetermined order (for example, , From the left to the right, from the left and right sides to the center side, or to another mode such as high-speed fluctuation just before the stop of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol.

  In this case, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and even if the periphery of the special display devices 43a and 43b is visually recognized, a fancy effect display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. In such a case, the display of the decoration lamp 461 corresponding to the effect display is more likely to be distracted. Accordingly, the above-described operation and effect of making the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  In addition, instead of or in addition to the decorative lamp 461, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal hold A decoration means which is controlled by the sub-controller 262 so as to be adjacent to any one of the display device 44 and the sub-display device 411, and which operates in association with (interlocked with) the variable display of the decoration symbol display device 42; A movable accessory as movable decoration means may be provided. For example, a movable character having a predetermined pattern (for example, a flower pattern) may be rotatably provided at the front of the position where the decorative lamp 461 was provided. Further, for example, a substantially frame-shaped movable member disposed in front of the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) of the above embodiment so as to surround the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411. Is provided, and the movable character is constituted by a pair of left and right U-shaped characters, and each U-shaped character protrudes and retracts a part of the sub-display device 411 in the same manner as the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443. It may be configured to be slidable left and right as well as to vibrate and rotate left and right.

  (D) In the above embodiment, upon determining the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417, the sub lamp pattern determination table to be referred to is determined based on the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, and the sub pattern is determined. By referring to the lamp pattern, one of the stop patterns of the plurality of sub lamps 417 is selected, and so on based on the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402. Although the configuration is such that the range of the stop pattern is narrowed, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 is a specific stop pattern, the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 may be determined by one pattern. Further, for example, although the stop pattern of the main display device 49 is different as shown in FIG. It is also possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to be present, to set the sub lamp 417 as a corresponding stop pattern when a win is made, and to select any other stop pattern when no win is made. Good.

  The change patterns and stop patterns of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the sub-display device 411 are not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. The special display devices 43a and 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the sub-display device 411, and the like include a segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, a dot display device, and a rotator display in addition to the plurality of LEDs. It may be configured by an apparatus or a combination of these.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 constituted by the liquid crystal display device is provided, but another display device may be employed. In addition, the decorative design display device 42 can be omitted. However, in parallel with the variable display of the main display device 49, by providing a means for effecting separately from the composite display device unit 40 (only sound or light emission of a lamp is possible), it is possible to improve the effect of the effect and the playability. Can be planned.

  (E) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 instructs the sub control device 262 to stop the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Is output, but need not be output. However, by outputting, the light emission mode of the sub-display device 411 and the operation of the covering shutter 441 can be adjusted to the light emission mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and special display is intentionally performed in the display mode of the sub-display device 411. The display mode of the devices 43a and 43b can be made more difficult to understand, or a meaningful display can be performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the sub-display device 411.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation information of the special display devices 43a and 43b is configured to be included in the fluctuation pattern command. It may be configured to be included.

  (F) In the above embodiment, a decorative panel is provided as a start-up covering means for covering at least the front of the second starting winning device 33b, and a game ball moving in the game area passes through a covered area covered by the decorative panel. A possible gate, or a ball entry device capable of entering a ball, and a pass detection means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the gate, or a ball entry detection device capable of detecting a game ball entered the ball entry device In the case where the passage detecting means or the incoming ball detecting means is detected, a pseudo-hold icon simulating a hold icon is displayed on the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the An arrangement may be made to derive an effect as to whether or not the display has been suspended.

  When such a configuration is employed, the sub-display means is provided adjacent to the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) or the second hold display device 45b (second hold lamp 404) as the hold display means. The sub-display device 411 (sub-lamp 417) may be provided to change the lighting mode of the corresponding sub-lamp 417 when the pseudo-hold icon is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42. In this case, when the composite display device unit 40 is visually recognized, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is determined at a glance that the variable display is not suspended.

  Note that the decorative panel may be configured to cover the front of the first start winning device 33a, or when the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are disposed relatively close to each other. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b may be configured to cover both. Further, in the present embodiment, the gate or the ball entry device constitutes a pseudo winning detection means, and the pseudo reserve icon corresponds to a pseudo winning mode.

  In addition, with regard to the pseudo-hold icon, in order to avoid a decrease in interest, if no fluctuation display of the special display devices 42a and 43b is held, it is assumed that the pseudo-prize detection means has performed detection. Is desirably configured not to be derived. Further, in order to suppress the occurrence of troubles caused by mistaking the pseudo hold icon as the hold icon to the end, it is desirable that the pseudo hold icon and the real hold icon be configured to have different aspects. Further, even when the hold icon is displayed, as a pre-stage, a precursor hold icon having the same form as the pseudo hold icon is first displayed, and then the precursor hold icon changes to the hold icon. It may be configured as follows. In this case, even if the pseudo-hold icon is displayed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is immediately determined that the icon is not the hold icon.

  (G) In the above embodiment, a decorative panel is provided as support coating means for covering at least the front of the through gate 34, and a gate through which a game ball moving in the game area can pass in a coating area covered by the decorative panel. And a passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the gate, and at least a normal symbol display of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (ordinary lamp 405) and the ordinary holding device 44 (ordinary holding lamp 406). A pseudo fluctuation display unit may be provided adjacent to the device 41, in which a switching display is performed when the detection of the passage detection unit is performed (for effect or decoration). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 has been stopped and the pattern of the stop display of the ordinary symbol display device 41. As a result, by visually recognizing the composite display unit 40, The act of opening the 2nd start winning device 33b (blade member 37) can be made more difficult.

  The pseudo-variation display means is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262, and a display unit (a plurality of LEDs in the above example) of the normal symbol display device 41 (and the normal hold display device 44) installed correspondingly. ) Is provided with the same display unit (a plurality of LEDs), and when the detection of the passage detection means is performed, the sub-control device 262 turns on the pseudo variation display means (for those corresponding to the ordinary symbol display device 41). Is a fluctuation pattern and a stop pattern).

  (H) In the above embodiment, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are provided as the covering shutter 441. However, the number and arrangement of the covering shutters 441 are not particularly limited. According to the above, it can be appropriately changed for each model. However, by providing the covering shutter 441 in a pair such as left and right or top and bottom, the covering sub lamp 417 is changed without changing the area of the exposed sub display 411 (the part of the exposed sub display 411 is also changed). Becomes possible. Further, the covering shutter 441 may be configured to cover all the sub lamps 417 at once. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are configured to be maintained at the exposure position during the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. The shutter 441 may be configured to operate. Further, the configuration of the covering shutter 441 is not particularly limited. For example, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 may be configured to be rotationally displaced, or may be displaced by a motor. Alternatively, a light guide plate or a half mirror may be provided as a covering shutter (covering means). In addition, a light emitting unit may be provided on the front surface of the covering shutter 441. For example, the same LED as the sub lamp 417 and the like is provided on the front surface of the covering shutter 441 in an arrangement corresponding to the sub lamp 417 and the like, and the lighting is controlled even when the covering shutter 441 is at the exposure position (similar to the sub lamp 417). In the case of utilizing, it is configured as a sub display means.)

  The covering shutter 441 (covering means) can be omitted. Further, even when the covering shutter 441 is omitted, for example, by changing the lighting mode of the sub-display device 411 (sub-lamp 417) as appropriate, for example, the first result in the success / failure lottery (for example, “16RS” is won) The first mode of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b (the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402) of the main display device 49 that teaches the first mode and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 are set. The combined first combined mode, the second mode of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 that teaches the second result (for example, “8RS” won) in the winning / non-winning lottery, and the sub lamp 417 The second combined mode in which the lighting mode is combined may be configured to have the same display mode (the displayed position is different, but the shape is the same). Also in this case, the operation and effect of making it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 is achieved.

  (I) In the above-described embodiment, if one second has elapsed since the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the next fluctuation display is not performed (the state shifts to the jackpot state or the standby state). Is switched to the display pattern corresponding to the standby state after the elapse of the fluctuation interval period (after one second in the above example), but until the next fluctuation display is started. , The display pattern may be maintained as a stop display.

  Further, in the composite display device unit 40, a game mode teaching device for teaching a game mode may be provided. When this configuration is adopted, the game mode teaching device may be configured so that the display modes indicating the same mode are switched and displayed in order, so that it is relatively difficult to determine the game mode.

  (J) In the above embodiment, at least one of the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 may be configured to be displaceable. For example, with respect to the various lamps of the main display device 49, the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 is vertically displaced by one line, or changes between a position where a predetermined sub lamp 417 is visible and a position where it is not visible. Or may be configured in such a manner. In this case, the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the main display device 49 and the display mode of the sub-display device 411 can be completely changed, and the display mode of the main display device 49 is recognized to grasp the final display. Can be more difficult to do.

  (K) In the above embodiment, the main display device 49 is stopped by providing the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) adjacent to the main display device 49 (first special figure lamp 401, second special figure lamp 402). Although it is configured to make it difficult to grasp the pattern, it may be configured to make it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 by another method. Hereinafter, an embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  (K-1) The composite display seed knit 40 shown in FIG. 49 basically has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 41 and the like), but includes a mounting panel 421 and a covering shutter 441 (first shutter). 442 and the second shutter 443), a relatively large gap is formed between the main display device 49 and the sub-display device 411 with respect to each back surface (rear surface) of the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443. An irradiation lamp 465 (such as an LED) is attached as irradiation means capable of irradiating light toward the light source. In this example, the light of the irradiation lamp 465 hits the special lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417. In addition, the color of the light of the irradiation lamp 465 of the present embodiment is the same as the color of the light of the special lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 (the irradiation lamp 465 is the special lamps 401 and 402, And the same lamp (LED) as the sub lamp 417 and the like is used).

  Further, the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are collectively mounted on the rear surface side of the mounting panel 421, and the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is the peripheral portion of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417. The light is also applied to the front surface of the mounting panel 421. In the present embodiment, the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is plated (not shown), so that the light reflectance of the front surface of the mounting panel 421 (the substantially transparent lamps of the special lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417) are formed. Surface).

  Further, a funnel shape is formed such that a peripheral portion of an insertion hole 422 into which the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are individually inserted is inclined backward toward the insertion hole 422 on the front surface of the mounting panel 421. Is formed.

  Further, the lighting of the irradiation lamp 465 is controlled by the sub-control device 262. The sub-control device 262, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 261, is information on the stop pattern of the special display devices 43a and 43b. The lighting mode of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) and the irradiation mode of the irradiation lamp 465 are determined. Furthermore, the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to change its form at least before and after the end of the variable display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. In the present embodiment, the irradiation lamp 465 is turned off during the fluctuation display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and is displayed until the interval period elapses after the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined lighting mode. , And flashes slowly during the fluctuating display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and from when the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined lighting mode until the interval period elapses. There are patterns such as flashing quickly.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is applied to the front of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamp 417, and the mounting panel 421 which is the peripheral portion thereof. Then, of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the one that is lit to teach the result of the success / failure lottery and the light of the irradiation lamp 465 illuminate the area including the boundary with the peripheral part, so that By making the contrast between images as blurry as possible, or by irradiating the special figure lamps 401 and 402 with the light of the irradiation lamp 465, whether the corresponding part is currently turned on or off. Can be difficult to understand. As a result, the operation and effect of making the stop pattern of the main display device 49 (the special figure lamps 401 and 402) difficult to understand (to make it difficult to make an instantaneous determination) is achieved.

  Furthermore, by irradiating light to a portion between the special figure lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417, it becomes difficult to recognize a boundary between the special figure lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417. The stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 becomes difficult to recognize. As a result, the operation and effect of grasping the stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and suppressing the consciousness of losing the special figure lamps 401 and 402 if they are not visually recognized are further enhanced. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface of the mounting panel 421, which is a peripheral portion of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417, is plated to increase the light reflectance. For this reason, by irradiating the light of the irradiation lamp 465, the effect of making the boundaries between the special figure lamps 401, 402, and the sub lamp 417, and the peripheral portion as much as possible is further enhanced. Becomes

  Further, the periphery of the insertion hole 422 for inserting the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 in the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is configured to be inclined rearward toward the insertion hole 422 side. I have. Accordingly, the peripheral portions of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 on the front surface of the mounting panel 421 are arranged laterally and forward (obliquely forward) of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411. It has an inclined surface inclined toward the irradiation lamp 465 side. With such an inclined surface, the light from the oblique front irradiated by the irradiation lamp 465 can be efficiently reflected forward (on the player side).

  In addition, the peripheral portions (at the front end) of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 (as viewed from the front player side) are not the substrates of the main display device 49 or the sub display device 411 but are attached. Since it is constituted by the panel 421, the processing of the peripheral parts of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is relatively free (such as increasing the reflectivity or forming a concave shape as described above). It can be done easily.

  The irradiation lamp 465 is configured to change its mode before and after the end (stop display) of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special figure lamps 401 and 402). In particular, after the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the configuration of the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to be relatively flashier than before the stop display. Accordingly, the above-described operation and effect of making it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 (the special figure lamps 401 and 402) is further achieved.

  Since the irradiation lamp 465 is controlled by the sub-control device 262, the display mode of the sub-lamp 417 is reduced while reducing the control load of the main control device 261 as compared with the case where the main control device 261 controls the irradiation lamp 465. And the irradiation state of the irradiation lamp 465 can be surely matched. The sub control device 262 determines the lighting mode of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) and the irradiation mode of the irradiation lamp 465 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 261. Therefore, the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 and the irradiation mode of the irradiation lamp 465 can be adjusted to the fluctuation display and the stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402.

  The irradiation lamp 465 is attached to the back side of the covering shutter 441, and is configured to be displaceable together with the covering shutter 441. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a displacement between the position of the covering shutter 441 and the irradiation mode (the position of the irradiated light) by the irradiation lamp 465. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, the same display mode of the composite display including the lighting mode of the first special figure lamp 401 and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 is the same. When it is possible to derive at different display positions, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are used to display the display unit of the sub display device 411 in order to make it difficult to understand that the display positions are different. In the case of adopting a configuration in which an unused area is covered, eight first special figure lamps 401 and six sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides of the first special figure lamp 401 among the sub lamps 417 are used. In the state of FIG. 45A, of the 14 LED groups configured, two LEDs on the left (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 1) and four LEDs on the right (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 2) Against While the light from the lamp 465 is irradiated, in the state of FIG. 45B, four on the left (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 2) and two on the right (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 1) It is possible to avoid that the light form of the irradiation lamp 465 is different, for example, when the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is irradiated to the LED. Therefore, it is easily estimated that the covering shutter 441 has been displaced by the mode of the light of the irradiation lamp 465, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the stop pattern of the main display device 49 (the special figure lamps 401 and 402) is easily recognized. can do. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the irradiation lamp 465 itself is directly visually recognized, resulting in a decrease in designability and the like.

  (K-2) In the above aspect example (k-1), the periphery of each insertion hole 432 in the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is configured to be inclined rearward toward the insertion hole 432 side. It is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a concave portion or a protruding portion similar to the front view shape of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 may be formed on the front surface of the mounting panel 421, and the light of the irradiation lamp 465 may be applied thereto. Good. Further, for example, the front surface of the mounting panel 421 may be formed with irregularities at random, or may be formed in a flat shape as in the above embodiment.

  Further, in the above embodiment (k-1), the irradiation lamp 465, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamp 417, and the like may be configured by a lamp capable of deriving a plurality of emission colors such as a three-color LED. Good. In this case, at the timing of the stop display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the irradiation lamp 465 is directed toward the special special figure lamps 401 and 402 and has the same color as the emission color of the special special figure lamps 401 and 402. It may be configured to emit light.

  In the above embodiment (k-1), the irradiation lamp 465 is attached to the back surface of the covering shutter 441. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to this configuration. For example, the special lamps 401, 402, and It may be mounted on the mounting panel 421 or provided with an irradiation table provided with an irradiation lamp 465 adjacent to the composite display unit 40 so that the irradiation lamp 465 is not displaced relative to the sub lamp 417. May be provided so as to be displaceable with respect to (ie, tiltable or rotatable by a driving force of a predetermined driving unit). Further, the irradiation lamp 465 may be provided at a position visible to the player, may be provided at a position not visible, or may be configured to be visible or hidden by the position of the covering shutter 441. .

  In addition, the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to irradiate the main display device 49 with light by reflecting the light with a reflecting means such as a mirror without irradiating the light directly from the light source toward the main display device 49 side. It is also possible. Further, in the above embodiment (k-1), the front surface of the mounting panel 421, which is the peripheral portion of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417, is plated, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. Absent. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the contrast between the special figure lamps 401, 402, and the sub lamp 417 and its peripheral portion by irradiating light from the irradiation lamp 465, at least the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is It is desirable to use a material having high reflectivity. As a material having a high reflectance, a material having a substantially constant reflection angle such as a mirror or a material having a different reflection angle such as a white plate may be used.

  47 and 48, the light of the decorative lamp 461 is not only on the front but also on the side, that is, the first special lamp 401, the second special lamp 402, the general lamp 405, the first holding lamp 403, and the first special lamp 405. The second holding lamp 404, the normal holding lamp 406, the sub lamp 417, and a peripheral portion thereof may be configured to be irradiated. In this case, the function and effect of making it difficult to see the boundary between these various lamps and their peripheral portions are further exhibited. In the case where the above configuration is adopted, the decoration lamp 461 forms an irradiation unit.

  Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment (k-1), "the front end of the light emitting means and the front surface of the mounting panel may be substantially at the same position in the front-rear direction". . Further, for example, "the front end of the light emitting means is formed in a planar shape" may be adopted. In the case where these configurations are adopted, an operational effect such as minimizing a difference in appearance between the light emitting means and the peripheral portion is further exhibited.

  In addition, in the above embodiment (k-1), the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to be able to irradiate the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamp 417, and the peripheral portion thereof. However, it is only necessary that the display device be configured to be able to irradiate at least the front side of the special display devices 43a and 43b provided with the special figure lamps 401 and 402. For example, in a configuration in which a sub lamp 417 is provided side by side with the holding lamps 403 and 404, and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 is changed in accordance with a change in the lighting mode of the holding lamps 403 and 404, the holding lamps 403 and 404 are irradiated with irradiation lamps. 465 may be applied, or in the case of changing the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 in accordance with the change of the lighting mode of the general lamp 405, the general lamp 405 may be illuminated. 465 may be applied.

  Note that, in a case where it is difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 by a method different from the sub-display device 411, the sub-display device 411 can be omitted.

  (L) In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 50, in front of the main display device 49, a turning mirror plate 471 configured to be rotatable about a vertical axis as a rotation axis is provided, and the left and right sides of the main display device 49 are provided. On both sides, a pair of left and right fixed mirror plates 472 and 473 extending inclining forward from the main display device 49 side toward the side may be provided.

  Then, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 50, when the rotating mirror plate 471 is rotated to the front left, the mode of the main display device 49 (the special figure lamps 401 and 402) is changed to the rotating mirror plate 471 and Then, the light is reflected by the left fixed mirror plate 472 and is visually recognized from the front. On the other hand, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50, when the rotating mirror plate 471 is rotated right forward, the mode of the main display device 49 is changed to the rotating mirror plate 471 and the right fixed mirror plate 473. And is visually recognized from the front. In this case, the display position of the main display device 49 can be instantaneously shifted (switched) to another position, and the operation effect of making it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 is achieved.

  Further, the composite display unit 40 shown in FIG. 50 is provided with a fixed-side light-emitting unit 475 (eg, an LED) as a sub-display unit, a decoration unit, or an irradiation unit, adjacent to the fixed mirror plates 472 and 473. In the rotation mirror plate 471 (a position not overlapping with the reflection mode of the main display device 49), a rotation side light emitting unit 476 (LED or the like) as a sub display unit, a decoration unit, or an irradiation unit is provided. The light emitted from the rotation-side light emitting unit 476 is reflected by the fixed mirror plates 472 and 473, and is emitted forward together with the light from the special figure lamps 401 and 402 described above. Further, the light of the fixed side light emitting unit 475 (the fixed side light emitting unit 475 on the side where the rotating mirror plate 471 is rotated) emits light together with the light of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the rotating side light emitting unit 476. , And is illuminated forward.

  In addition, the rotating mirror plate 471 is configured to be displaced immediately before the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are stopped. Further, the turning side light emitting unit 476 is also configured such that the lighting mode changes in accordance with the change in the lighting mode of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, like the sub lamp 417 of the above embodiment. As a result, the operation and effect of making it difficult to recognize the stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 can be more reliably achieved.

  The rotating mirror plate 471 is configured to stop even at a position directly opposite to the front surface (the mounting panel 421) of the main display device 49, and is connected to the special figure lamps 401 and 402 of the rotating mirror plate 471. The opposing part may be configured by a beam splitter. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of patterns in which the turning state of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 is seen through the turning mirror plate 471 with the turning mirror plate 471 facing directly.

  (M) In the above embodiment, the variable display based on the entering of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b has priority over the variable display based on the entering of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. However, regardless of which one of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display based on a ball being entered, the order is held in the reserved order. The variable display may be configured to be digested. Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display based on the ball entry (only by visually checking the hold icon). Although it is a configuration that cannot be grasped, it may be configured so that it is possible to recognize which of the variable displays corresponds.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to display the same number of holding icons as the upper limit of the variable display holding number of the special display devices 43a and 43b. , 43b, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to display only up to four pending icons even when five or more variable displays are suspended in total. Further, in the case where the number of hold icons can be displayed as many as the upper limit of the number of hold of the variable display (eight in the above example), the display space (hold display area) of the hold icons is first reduced. The configuration may be such that the four reserved icons that are consumed later are displayed smaller than the four reserved icons that are performed. In addition, the mode of the four reserved icons that are consumed later may be configured to be a simplified form in which the number of reserved icons can be grasped.

  (N) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / non-winning lottery is changed. However, the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period (variation) of the high ball entry state given after the end of the jackpot state The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the number and arrangement of the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the through gates 34 are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the winning / dropping lottery performed when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the winning / dropping lottery performed when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b are separated. Is referred to and the jackpot classification is changed, but may be the same.

  (O) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 performs the normal process (see FIG. 10) after the main process (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal processing in the above-described embodiment is performed. For example, in the timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The processing performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing in step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, A configuration that turns on a flag indicating the occurrence of the error. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as an NMI interrupt process, as in the above embodiment.

  (P) In the above embodiment, the information as to whether or not the big hit state occurs is overwritten in the hit random number storage area storing the value of the hit random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, in addition to the winning random number storage area for the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot occurs may be provided. In addition to the area, an execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and a storage area individually corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition, a storage area for storing a jackpot type may be provided separately from the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the special symbol change display, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and a process corresponding to the confirmation process is performed. May be configured.

  (Q) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable area that can be changed to a specific area where a game ball moving in the game area can enter the ball, an open state allowing ball entry into the specific area, and a closed state prohibiting ball entry into the specific area ( Wing member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and a game ball entering a specific ball entry means is detected. Specific ball detecting means (condition satisfaction detecting means), special starting means provided outside the specific area and allowing game balls moving in the game area to enter the ball, and detecting a game ball entering the special starting means A special start detecting means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and a main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means. No matter which ball you enter, a given number of game values (game balls) are given to the player The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, a small hitting state in which the variable ball entry means is opened once or a plurality of times only for a first time, or The second time is longer than the second time, or whether a large hit state in which the predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning means in the open state as one round and this is repeated a specified number of times is generated. The winning or losing lottery is performed, and if a small hit is won in the winning or losing lottery, a small hit state is generated. It may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state. In addition to pachinko machines, the game will be implemented as various types of gaming machines such as arranged ball machines, similar sparrow balls, slot machines as spinning machines, and machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. May be.

[Appendix]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  P. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as that a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball-in means provided on the game board or not to generate a hit state. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, a main control display means such as a main display means for directly teaching a fixed matter such as the result of the lottery is provided, and an effect display means which may only merely indicate the fixed matter may be provided. Many are provided (for example, see JP-A-2006-271480). In the effect display means, there is a case where the teaching of the fixed matter is postponed only by roughly suggesting the fixed matter. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the production, add inflections and the like by the game, and improve the production performance and the game performance.

  By the way, it may be possible to advance the game advantageously by knowing previously determined matters such as the result of the lottery. In this case, the display mode of the main control display means is grasped and the main control Is relatively large (for example, (Differences in game value to be ultimately obtained).

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its object is to provide a player who visually recognizes the main control display means and a player who does not visually recognize the main control display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a difference in gaming results between the gaming machines.

Means P-1. Main control means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the winning / rejecting lottery;
A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main control display means directly controlled by the main control means,
(Effect display means directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means and effect display means for effect display related to the display of the main control display means)
Direct control by the sub-control means, or is controlled indirectly, comprising a sub-control display means whose display is switched in synchronization with the main control display means,
The gaming machine, wherein the sub-control display means is arranged adjacent to the main control display means and includes a display unit similar to a display unit of the main control display means.

  According to the means P-1, a display synchronized with the display of the main control display means is performed on the sub control display means arranged adjacent to the main control display means, and the sub control display means has the same display as the main control display means. It has a part. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main control display means is the display mode of the main control display means and the sub control display means. It is possible to make it difficult for the control display means to understand the contents taught by the display (corresponding events and the like) (to make it difficult to make an instantaneous determination). Therefore, for example, while visually recognizing the main control display means, a player who tries to play an efficient game based on such information, a player who does not know the display pattern of the main control display means, or an effect display means And other players who do not want to visually recognize the main control display means because they want to enjoy another effect performed in parallel with the confirmation display of the game, etc. (for example, the difference in the game value finally acquired) ) Can be minimized. In other words, a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the main control display means relatively loses as much as the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the main control display means gains. Can be suppressed. As a result, the display pattern of the main control display means can be grasped, and the consciousness of losing the display if the main control display means is not visually recognized can be suppressed. You can fully enjoy the different displays that are performed.

  Further, in order to make the display of the main control display means difficult to understand, the pseudo display is performed by the sub control display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make the display of the main control display means incomprehensible, the control load on the main control means can be reduced or the main control display means can be simplified as compared with a case where the main control display means is made more complicated. Can be planned.

  In addition, as the special game state, for example, not only the hit state in the pachinko machine, a state in which the winning probability in a predetermined lottery such as a win / fail lottery is increased, or an open state in which game balls moving in the game area can enter the ball. The starting ball entry means that changes to a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered is in an open state, and the like.

  Note that the main control display means is embodied as “main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery”. The configuration embodied in “sub-display means that is controlled directly or indirectly and performs pseudo-display synchronized with the confirmed display of the main display means” will be described below in the means A-1. In addition, the main control display means is embodied as “suspension display means that is directly controlled by the main control means and teaches the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means”. Is directly or indirectly controlled by a sub-display unit that can execute switching display when the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored in the hold storage unit. Means B-1 are described below.

  Means P-2. Means P-1 wherein at least a part of one of the display unit of the main control display unit and the display unit of the sub-control display unit is arranged to be sandwiched by the other. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means P-2, the appearance of the main control display means and the appearance of the sub-control display means become more complicated. Accordingly, it is possible to make it more difficult to instantly recognize the display mode of the main control display unit from the entire display mode constituted by the display mode of the main control display unit and the display mode of the sub control display unit.

Means P-3. The main control means is configured to be able to output information on the display of the main control display means to the sub-control means,
The gaming machine according to the means P-1 or P-2, wherein the sub-control means determines the display of the sub-control display means based on information on the display of the main control display means.

  According to the unit P-3, the display mode of the sub-control display unit can be adjusted to the display mode of the main control display unit. Therefore, the display mode of the sub-control display unit is more effectively combined with the display mode of the main control display unit to derive a more apparent display, or the stop mode of the sub-control display unit is changed to the main control display unit. In combination with the stop mode, a predetermined meaningful display can be derived. Therefore, the operation and effect of making the display pattern of the main control display means more difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  Means P-4. The sub-control display unit includes a cover unit that can be displaced between a cover position that covers a part of the display unit and an exposure position that exposes the part of the display unit of the sub-control display unit. A gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-3.

  According to the means P-4, the visible range of the sub-control display means that can be visually recognized is changed by the displacement of the covering means, and is constituted by the display form of the main control display means and the display form of the sub-control display means. The entire display mode can be completely changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main control display means.

  The display section of the main control display means is configured so as not to be covered by the covering means. Further, it is also possible to provide "the coating driving means for driving the coating means, and the coating driving means is driven and controlled by the sub-control means". In this case, the display mode of the sub-control display unit and the driving state of the coating driving unit are surely matched while reducing the control burden of the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit controls the coating driving unit. Can be.

Means P-5. The main control display means and the sub control display means,
In the case where the covering means is at the exposure position, a display mode using a display unit provided in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means at the covering position among the sub-control display means, The same display mode as the display mode of the main control display means,
Means P-4 wherein, when the covering means is at the covering position, the sub-control display means can be derived without using a display portion covered by the covering means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

Means P-6. The covering means is a first covering means capable of covering a part of a display part of the sub-control display means, and a first covering means capable of covering a part of the display part of the sub-control display means different from the first covering means. 2 covering means,
The main control display means and the sub control display means,
The display mode of the sub-control display unit and the display mode of the main control display unit that are visible when the first coating unit is at the coating position and the second coating unit is at the exposure position. The same as the configured display mode,
The display mode of the sub-control display unit and the display mode of the main control display unit that are visible when the first coating unit is at the exposure position and the second coating unit is at the coating position. The gaming machine according to the means A-4 or P-5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to be derived.

  As a specific example of the means P-5 and the means P-6, three same segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and from the left as a first sub-control display means, a main control display means, and a second sub-control display means. In addition to the above, a first covering means capable of covering the first sub-control display means and a second covering means capable of covering the second sub-control display means are provided. When the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposing position, "1" is displayed on the main control display means and "3" is displayed on the second sub-control display means. And when the first covering means is at the exposure position and the second covering means is at the covering position, "1" is displayed on the first control sub-display means and "3" is displayed on the main control display means. Is displayed, the same number "13" is displayed. As described above, the display (teaching contents) of the main control display means is different, but when combined with the display of the sub-control display means, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as a whole, so that the display of the main control display means can be understood. The above-mentioned effects, such as making it difficult, can be more reliably achieved. By adopting the configuration of the means P-3, even if the position of the covering means is different, the phenomenon that the same display mode is derived as the whole display section of the main control display means and the sub control display means is caused by accident. Instead, it is possible to increase the possibility of deriving by aiming (pinpoint) or by deriving (by limiting the pattern to be associated to some extent).

  In particular, when the configuration of the unit P-6 is adopted, the main control display visually recognized by the player by the first covering unit and the second covering unit operating synchronously (moving the same distance in the same direction). The area obtained by adding the area of the display section of the means and the area of the display section of the sub-control display means can always be the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the main control display unit and the sub control display unit needs to be changed due to the difference in the area.

  The number of covering means having the same relationship as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means P-6 is not particularly limited. May be provided. Further, the first coating means and the second coating means are not limited to those constituted by one plate, respectively. It may be configured so as to be operable.

  Means P-7. The main control display means, and the sub-control display means, each including a light-emitting substrate mounted with a plurality of light-emitting means, a display unit of the main control display means, and a display unit of the sub-control display means, The gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-6, characterized by being constituted by the plurality of light emitting means.

  According to the means P-7, control simplification and the like are achieved as compared with the case where the main control display means and the sub control display means are constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and compared with the case where the main control display means and the sub control display means are constituted by a segment display device. The degree of freedom in design is improved. Note that "the light emitting means of the main control display means and the light emitting means of the sub control display means may be arranged in a matrix as a whole". In this case, the design effect can be improved, and the effect of making the boundary between the main control display means and the sub-control display means difficult to understand can be further exhibited.

Means P-8. A mounting panel formed with an insertion hole on the display side of the main control display unit and the sub-control display unit, into which the light-emitting units of the main control display unit and the sub-control display unit can be individually inserted. Is provided,
The main control display means and the sub-control display means are characterized in that the light-emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light-emitting substrate is fixed in contact with the mounting panel. 7. The gaming machine according to 7.

  According to the means P-8, the light emitting boards of the main control display means and the sub control display means can be positioned by the mounting panel. Therefore, the light emitting means of the main control display means and the light emitting means of the sub control display means can be installed on the same plane without displacement. For example, the light emitting means of the main control display means and the sub control display It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the light emitting means from the light emitting means.

  Further, the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the main control display means and the light emitting substrate of the sub control display means and the surface of the light emitting substrate can be hidden by the mounting panel. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the light emitting means of the main control display means from the light emitting means of the sub control display means, and to improve the design and the convenience.

Means P-9. The plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means are arranged in a matrix,
The plurality of light-emitting means of the sub-control display means are arranged in a matrix with the light-emitting means of the main control display means so as to follow the matrix of the light-emitting means of the main control display means,
The confirmed display performs a variable display by changing the position or combination of the light emitting units to be turned on among the plurality of light emitting units of the main control display unit, and after a specified time, the main control unit The plurality of light emitting means of the display means is configured to be lit in a combination associated with the result of the lottery,
During the variable display of the main control display means, the plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means and the sub control display means are arranged in an entire arrangement by the plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means and the sub control display means. The gaming machine according to means P-7 or P-8, wherein lighting and extinguishing are repeated in a regular manner.

  For example, when the plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means arranged in a matrix are turned on regularly in order, the arrangement of the light emitting means of the main control display means is interrupted, but instead, the sub control display means When the light-emitting means of the sub-control display means are arranged in a line, the regular lighting mode can be extended to the entire main control display means and the sub-control display means. . Therefore, the appearance of the variable display of the main control display means can be improved (natural), and the separation between the light emitting means of the main control display means and the light emitting means of the sub control display means can be made difficult to understand. When the display means stops changing, the above operation and effect of making the display of the main control display means difficult to understand can be more reliably achieved.

  Means P-10. During the variable display of the main control display means, when at least one of the light emitting means of the main control display means and the sub control display means is lit, at least one of the light emitting means of the main control display means is turned on. The gaming machine according to means P-9, wherein one of the gaming machines is turned on.

  According to the means P-10, it is possible to reliably indicate that the main control display means is performing the variable display.

Means P-11. Directly by the sub-control means, or, indirectly controlled, provided with an effect display means for effect display related to the display of the main control display means,
Directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means adjacent to at least one of the main control display means and the sub-control display means, and associated (linked) with the effect display of the effect display means. The gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-10, further comprising decoration display means for performing decoration display.

  According to the means P-11, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the main control display means, and even if the peripheral part of the main control display means is visually recognized, a flashy effect display is performed by the effect display means. In such a case, it becomes easier for the user to pay attention to the decoration display corresponding to the effect display. Therefore, the above-mentioned operation and effect, such as making the display of the main control display means difficult to understand, is further achieved. It should be noted that the decoration display means may have the same display section as the display sections of the main control display means and the sub-control display means.

  Means P-12. The gaming machine according to any of means P-1 to P-11, wherein at least one of the main control display means and the sub control display means is configured to be displaceable.

  According to the means P-12, it is possible to completely change the display form of the main control display means and the display form of the sub-control display means, and to recognize the display form of the main control display means. Things can be made more difficult.

  A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as that a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball-in means provided on the game board or not to generate a hit state. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, in many cases, there is provided an effect display means which is performed following the variable display performed by the main display means and performs a variable display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, see JP-A-2006-271480. In the effect display means, even at the timing when the result of the lottery is taught by the main display means, the teaching of the result of the lottery may be postponed only by roughly suggesting the result of the lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the production, add inflections and the like by the game, and improve the production performance and the game performance.

  By the way, in some cases, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by knowing the result of the lottery first. In this case, a game in which the player is grasping the display mode of the main display means and playing the game while visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, enjoying an effect in the effect display means (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired). There is a concern that it will be attached.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game between a player who visually recognizes a main display means and a player who does not visually recognize a main display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a difference in gaming results.

Means A-1. Main control means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the winning / rejecting lottery;
A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
A main display unit that is directly controlled by the main control unit and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the winning / wrong lottery;
Direction display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and teaches the result of the success / failure lottery, or effect display for indicating is performed,
Direct display by the sub-control means, or is controlled indirectly, comprising a sub-display means for performing a pseudo display in which the start and end timing is synchronized with the confirmed display of the main display means,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the sub display means is arranged adjacent to the main display means and has a display unit similar to a display unit for performing the final display of the main display means.

  According to the means A-1, the pseudo display synchronized with the final display of the main display means (not related to the result of the success / failure lottery) is performed on the sub-display means arranged adjacent to the main display means, and the sub-display means is operated by the main display means. Since the display unit includes the same display unit as the display unit, the pseudo display has a display mode similar to the final display. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main display unit and the sub-display unit is the display mode of the main display unit, and it is also difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display unit. Harder). Therefore, for example, while visually confirming the final display (contents taught by) of the main display unit, the player trying to play an efficient game based on such information and the final display of the main display unit are grasped. Difference between the game result and the player who does not want to view the main display means because he wants to enjoy the effects of the effect display means or the like (for example, the difference in the game value finally acquired). It can be as small as possible. In other words, a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the main display means relatively loses money is saved by a player who immediately plays the game in correspondence with the display mode of the main display means. be able to. As a result, it is possible to grasp the final display pattern of the main display means and to suppress the consciousness of losing the display if the main display means is not visually recognized, and fully enjoy the effect display of the effect display means. You can get it.

  Further, in order to make the final display of the main display means difficult to understand, the pseudo display is performed by the sub display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make the finalized display of the main display unit difficult to understand, the control load of the main control unit can be reduced or the main display unit can be simplified as compared with a case where the finalized display of the main display unit is made more complicated. Can be planned.

  Means A-2. The unit A-1 according to the means A-1, wherein at least a part of one of the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub-display unit is disposed so as to be sandwiched by the other. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A-2, the appearance of the main display means and the appearance of the sub-display means become more complicated. Therefore, the display mode of the main display unit is instantaneously recognized (while the final display is being displayed) from the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the main display unit and the display mode of the sub-display unit. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the final display.

Means A-3. The main control means is configured to be able to output information on the final display of the main display means to the sub-control means,
The gaming machine according to the means A-1 or A-2, wherein the sub-control means determines the pseudo-display of the sub-display means based on information on the confirmed display of the main display means.

  According to the means A-3, the display mode of the sub display means can be adjusted to the display mode of the main display means. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display unit is more effectively combined with the display mode of the main display unit to derive a more apparent display, and the stop mode of the sub display unit is combined with the stop mode of the main display unit. At the same time, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived. Therefore, the operation and effect of making the final display pattern of the main display means more difficult to understand can be further exhibited.

  Means A-4. The display device further includes a cover unit that can be displaced between a cover position that covers a part of the display unit of the sub-display unit and an exposure position that exposes the part of the display unit of the sub-display unit. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3.

  According to the means A-4, the visible range of the sub-display means that can be visually recognized is changed by the displacement of the covering means, and the entire display composed of the display mode of the main display means and the display mode of the sub-display means. The embodiment can be completely changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main display unit and to grasp the final display.

  The display section of the main display means is configured so as not to be covered by the covering means. Further, it is also possible to provide "the coating driving means for driving the coating means, and the coating driving means is driven and controlled by the sub-control means". In this case, the display mode of the sub-display unit and the driving state of the coating driving unit can be surely matched while reducing the control burden on the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit controls the coating driving unit. it can.

Means A-5. The main display means and the sub display means,
In the case where the covering means is at the exposure position, a display mode using a display unit provided in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means at the covering position among the sub-display means; The same as the display mode composed of the display mode of the main display means,
The means A-4, wherein when the covering means is at the covering position, the sub-display means can be derived without using a display portion covered by the covering means. The described gaming machine.

Means A-6. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of a display portion of the sub-display means, and a second covering capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub-display means different from the first covering means. Means,
The main display means and the sub display means,
When the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposure position, the display means is configured to include a display mode of the sub display module and a display mode of the main display module that are visible. The same display mode as
The display mode of the sub display unit and the display mode of the main display unit that can be visually recognized when the first covering unit is at the exposure position and the second covering unit is at the covering position can be derived. A gaming machine according to the means A-4 or A-5, wherein

  As a specific example of the means A-5 and the means A-6, three same segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as a first sub-display means, a main display means, and a second sub-display means from the left. A first covering means capable of covering the first sub-display means and a second covering means capable of covering the second sub-display means. When the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposed position, "1" is displayed on the main display means, and "3" is displayed on the second sub-display means. And when the first covering means is at the exposure position and the second covering means is at the covering position, "1" is displayed on the first sub-display means, and "3" is displayed on the main display means. In both cases, the same number “13” is displayed. As described above, although the display (teaching contents) of the main display unit is different, when combined with the display of the sub-display unit, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as a whole, thereby making the final display of the main display unit difficult to understand. The above operation and effect are more reliably achieved. Incidentally, by adopting the configuration of the means A-3, the phenomenon that the same display mode is derived as the entire display section of the main display means and the sub-display means, even if the position of the covering means is different, is not caused by accident. It is possible to increase the possibility of deriving by aiming (pinpoint) or deriving (by limiting the pattern to be associated to some extent).

  In particular, when the configuration of the unit A-6 is adopted, the first display unit and the second coating unit operate in synchronization (moving the same distance in the same direction), and thus the main display unit visually recognized by the player. And the area obtained by adding the area of the display section of the sub-display means and the area of the display section of the sub-display means can always be the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the main display unit and the sub display unit needs to be changed from the difference in the area.

  The number of covering means having the same relationship as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means A-6 is not particularly limited. For example, covering means are provided on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the main display means. It may be provided. Further, the first coating means and the second coating means are not limited to those constituted by one plate, respectively. It may be configured so as to be operable.

  Means A-7. The main display unit and the sub-display unit each include a light-emitting substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting units are mounted, and the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub-display unit include the plurality of light-emitting substrates. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized by being constituted by means.

  According to the means A-7, simplification of control and the like is achieved as compared with the case where the main display means and the sub-display means are constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the design is reduced as compared with the case where the main display means and the sub-display means are constituted by a segment display device. The degree of freedom is improved. Note that "the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means may be arranged in a matrix as a whole". In this case, the design effect is improved, and the effect of making the boundary between the main display means and the sub-display means difficult to see is further enhanced.

Means A-8. The main display means, and a display panel side of the sub-display means is provided with a mounting panel formed with an insertion hole capable of individually inserting the light-emitting means of the main display means and the sub-display means,
The main display unit and the sub-display unit are characterized in that the light-emitting unit is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light-emitting substrate is fixed to the mounting panel in a contact state. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means A-8, it is possible to position the light emitting boards of the main display means and the sub display means by the mounting panel. Therefore, the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub-display means can be installed on the same plane without displacement. Can be hardly distinguished.

  Further, the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the main display unit and the light emitting substrate of the sub display unit and the surface of the light emitting substrate can be hidden by the mounting panel. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the light emitting unit of the main display unit from the light emitting unit of the sub display unit, and to improve the design and the convenience.

Means A-9. The plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit are arranged in a matrix,
The plurality of light emitting means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix with the light emitting means of the main display means so as to follow the matrix of the light emitting means of the main display means,
The confirmed display performs a variable display by changing a position or a combination of the light emitting units to be lit among the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit, and after a specified time, the main display unit A plurality of the light emitting means are configured to be lit in a combination corresponding to the result of the lottery,
During the variable display of the main display unit, the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit and the sub display unit are regular in the entire arrangement of the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit and the sub display unit. The gaming machine according to means A-7 or A-8, wherein lighting and extinguishing are repeated.

  For example, when the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit arranged in a matrix are turned on in a regular order, the arrangement of the light emitting units of the main display unit is interrupted. In the case where are arranged, by turning on the light emitting means of the sub-display means, the regular lighting mode can be applied to the entire main display means and sub-display means. Therefore, the appearance of the variable display of the main display means can be improved (natural), and the separation between the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means can be made difficult to understand. At the time of stop, the above-mentioned operation and effect of making the final display of the main display means difficult to understand can be more reliably achieved.

  Means A-10. During the variable display of the main display unit, in a state where at least one of the light emitting units of the main display unit and the sub display unit is turned on, at least one of the light emitting units of the main display unit is turned on. The gaming machine according to means A-9, wherein:

  According to the means A-10, it is possible to reliably indicate that the main display means is performing variable display.

  Means A-11. An operation (directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control unit, adjacent to at least one of the main display unit and the sub-display unit, corresponding to (interlocked with) the effect display of the effect display unit ( The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-10, further comprising a decoration (display) means for performing decoration display).

  According to the means A-11, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the main display means, and even when the peripheral part of the main display means is visually recognized, a fancy effect display is performed by the effect display means. And the like, it becomes easier for the user to pay more attention to the operation of the decoration means corresponding to the effect display. Therefore, the above-mentioned operation and effect of making the final display of the main display means difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  In addition, "the decoration means is decoration display means for performing decoration display corresponding to the effect display, and the decoration display means has the same display unit as the display unit of the main display unit and the sub display unit. That ". Further, as the decoration means, instead of or in addition to the decoration display means, "directly or indirectly by the sub-control means adjacent to at least one of the main display means and the sub-display means. A movable decoration means that is controlled and performs an operation corresponding (linked) to the effect display of the effect display means ”.

  Means A-12. The gaming machine according to means A-11, wherein the decoration means changes in form before and after the end timing of the confirmed display.

  According to the means A-12, since the mode change of the decoration means occurs at the timing of the end of the definite display, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight to the decoration means at the timing of the end of the definite display. Therefore, the above-described operation and effect of making it difficult to grasp the final display on the main display unit is further achieved.

  In addition, the decoration means may be configured so that the appearance is more flashy after the final display than before. As a decorative display means, for example, it is assumed that there is no change in lighting before the end of the finalized display (things that have disappeared remain off and those that are lit remain on), and after completion, the lighting and turning off rapidly change. May be configured. Furthermore, for example, the display may be configured to display various colors after the end of the fixed display, while the display is the single white color before the end of the finalized display. In addition, as the movable decoration means, for example, the main display means and the sub-display means may be configured in a frame shape so as to surround the main display means and the sub-display means, and may be configured not to be displaced before the end of the fixed display but to be displaced after the end. . When these configurations are adopted, the operation and effect of attracting interest in the decoration means at the timing of the end of the final display will be further exhibited.

  Means A-13. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-12, wherein at least one of the main display means and the sub display means is configured to be displaceable.

  According to the means A-13, it is possible to completely change the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the main display section and the display mode of the sub-display section, and to recognize the display mode of the main display section and to perform the final display. Can be more difficult to grasp.

Means A-14. The confirmation display is performed by changing and displaying the identification information in the main display means, and stopping and displaying the identification information in a form associated with the result of the success / failure lottery,
In the main display unit, after the change display of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the stop mode of the identification information is maintained for a specified time, and a change interval period for prohibiting the start of the change display of the identification information is set,
When the variable display of the identification information is not started after the elapse of the variable interval period, the identification information is associated with a state in which the variable display of the identification information is not performed. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13.

  According to the means A-14, it is possible to prevent the effect of making it difficult to grasp the fixed display by displaying the stop mode of the fixed display (result of the success / absence lottery) indefinitely.

  B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as that a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball-in means provided on the game board or not to generate a hit state. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  Further, when a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means during the fluctuation display on the main display means, the fluctuation display corresponding to that is held and stored, and is performed after the currently displayed fluctuation display. It has been known. Further, many of them are provided with a holding display unit for teaching the number of holdings of the variable display.

  In general, an upper limit is set for the variable display on-hold storage, so that the on-hold storage exceeding the upper limit is not performed. For this reason, a relatively large difference (for example, the final result) between the player who is playing the game so that the storage of the variable display does not exceed the upper limit and the player who keeps firing the game ball, etc. Of the game value to be acquired).

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game between a player who visually recognizes the hold display means and a player who does not visually recognize the hold display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a difference in gaming results.

Means B-1. Firing means for firing a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board, in which game balls fired by the firing means are guided;
Starting ball entry means in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
Starting ball detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball input means,
A main control for performing a win / fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the starting ball detecting means, and generating the special game state based on the result of the win / loss lottery Means,
A sub-control unit capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control unit;
A main display unit that is directly controlled by the main control unit and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the winning / wrong lottery;
Direction display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and teaches the result of the success / failure lottery, or effect display for indicating is performed,
Information detection means for obtaining information used for the winning / failure lottery when detection of the starting ball detection means is performed,
The information acquired by the information acquisition means, comprising a plurality of hold storage means capable of storing a plurality of up to a predetermined number,
During the execution of the confirmation display on the main display unit (during the fluctuation display), if the detection of the starting ball detection unit is performed, the confirmation display corresponding to the detection is performed by the confirmation display being executed. After the configuration,
Hold display means, which is directly controlled by the main control means and teaches the number of hold memories stored in the hold storage means,
A sub-display unit that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control unit and is capable of executing switching display when the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored in the hold storage unit. ,
The gaming machine, wherein the sub display means is arranged adjacent to the hold display means and has a display unit similar to a display unit of the hold display means.

  According to the means B-1, similarly to the hold display means, the sub-display device whose display mode changes when the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the hold storage means is provided to the hold display means. The sub display unit is provided adjacent to the display unit and has the same display unit as the hold display unit. For this reason, it is difficult to know which of the display modes of the hold display means is the display mode of the hold display means and the sub display means, and it is also difficult to understand the pattern of the display mode of the hold display means. Harder). Therefore, it is determined whether the information used for the success / failure lottery is newly stored in the suspension storage means, or how many times the information used for the success / failure lottery is stored in the suspension storage means (how many times the suspension storage is performed). Is there anyway?)

  Thereby, while visually recognizing the display mode of the hold display means (the number of hold memories taught by the hold means), based on such information, an efficient game (e.g., the game balls are not fired when the upper limit of the hold memory is reached) ) And a player who keeps firing the game ball (for example, a player who does not know the display mode of the hold display means, or a hold display because the player wants to enjoy the effects of the effect display means and the like). It is possible to minimize a difference in a game result (for example, a difference in a game value to be finally obtained) between the game result and a player who does not visually recognize the means. In other words, a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the hold display means relatively loses money is saved by the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the hold display means. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the consciousness that the suspension display means is lost unless it is checked at any time, and to fully enjoy the effect display and the like of the effect display means.

  Further, for example, in order to make the hold display of the hold display means difficult to understand, the control load on the main control means is reduced, and the hold display means is simplified as compared with a case where the hold display of the hold display means is made more complicated. Can be planned.

  Means B-2. The display unit according to claim B-1, wherein at least a part of one of the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub-display unit is disposed so as to be sandwiched by the other. Gaming machine.

  According to the means B-2, the display form of the hold display means and the display form of the sub-display means become more complicated. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to instantly recognize and grasp the display mode of the hold display unit from the entire display mode constituted by the display mode of the hold display unit and the display mode of the sub-display unit.

Means B-3. The main control unit is configured to be able to output information on the display mode of the hold display unit to the sub-control unit,
The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2, wherein the sub-control means determines the display mode of the sub-display means based on information on the display mode of the hold display means.

  According to the means B-3, the display mode of the sub display means can be matched with the display mode of the hold display means. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display unit is more effectively combined with the display mode of the hold display unit to derive a more apparent display, and the stop mode of the sub display unit is combined with the stop mode of the hold display unit. At the same time, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived. Therefore, the effect of making the pattern of the display mode of the hold display means more difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  Means B-4. The display device further includes a cover unit that can be displaced between a cover position that covers a part of the display unit of the sub-display unit and an exposure position that exposes the part of the display unit of the sub-display unit. A gaming machine according to any of means B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4, the visible range of the sub-display means that can be visually recognized is changed by the displacement of the covering means, and the entire display composed of the display form of the hold display means and the display form of the sub-display means. The embodiment can be completely changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize and grasp the display mode of the suspension display unit.

  The display section of the suspension display means is configured so as not to be covered by the covering means. Further, it is also possible to provide "the coating driving means for driving the coating means, and the coating driving means is driven and controlled by the sub-control means". In this case, the display mode of the sub-display unit and the driving state of the coating driving unit can be surely matched while reducing the control burden on the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit controls the coating driving unit. it can.

Means B-5. The hold display means and the sub display means,
In the case where the covering means is at the exposure position, a display mode using a display unit provided in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means at the covering position among the sub-display means, The same as the display mode configured with the display mode of the hold display unit,
The means B-4, wherein when the covering means is at the covering position, the sub-display means is configured to be able to be derived without using a display portion covered by the covering means. The described gaming machine.

Means B-6. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of a display portion of the sub-display means, and a second covering capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub-display means different from the first covering means. Means,
The hold display means and the sub display means,
When the first covering means is at the covering position, and when the second covering means is at the exposure position, the display form of the sub display means and the display form of the hold display means are visible. The same display mode as
When the first covering means is at the exposure position and the second covering means is at the covering position, the display form of the sub display means and the display form of the hold display means can be derived. The gaming machine according to means B-4 or B-5, wherein

  According to the means B-5 and the means B-6, the display (teaching contents) of the hold display means is different, but when combined with the display of the sub-display means, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as a whole, thereby enabling the hold. The above-described operation and effect of making the display mode of the display means difficult to understand can be more reliably achieved. Incidentally, by adopting the configuration of the means B-3, the phenomenon that the same display mode is derived as the entire display unit of the hold display means and the sub-display means even if the position of the covering means is different is not a coincidence. It is possible to increase the possibility of deriving by aiming (pinpoint) or deriving (by limiting the pattern to be associated to some extent).

  In particular, when the configuration of the means B-6 is adopted, the first display means and the second display means operate in synchronism (move the same distance in the same direction), so that the hold display means visually recognized by the player. And the area obtained by adding the area of the display section of the sub-display means and the area of the display section of the sub-display means can always be the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the hold display unit and the sub display unit needs to be changed due to the difference in the area.

  The number of covering means having the same relationship as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means B-6 is not particularly limited. It may be provided. Further, the first coating means and the second coating means are not limited to those constituted by one plate, respectively. It may be configured so as to be operable.

  Means B-7. The suspension display unit and the sub-display unit each include a light-emitting substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting units are mounted, and the display unit of the suspension-display unit and the display unit of the sub-display unit are each provided with the plurality of light-emitting substrates. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, characterized by being constituted by means.

  According to the means B-7, simplification of control and the like is achieved as compared with the case where the hold display means and the sub-display means are constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the design is reduced as compared with the case where the hold display means and the sub-display means are constituted by a segment display device. The degree of freedom is improved. Note that "the light-emitting means of the hold display means and the light-emitting means of the sub-display means may be arranged in a matrix as a whole". In this case, the design effect is improved, and the effect of making the boundary between the hold display means and the sub-display means difficult to see is further enhanced.

Means B-8. The holding display means, and a display panel side of the sub-display means is provided with a mounting panel formed with an insertion hole capable of individually inserting each of the light-emitting means of the hold display means and the sub-display means,
The reserve display means, and the sub-display means, wherein the light-emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light-emitting board is fixed in a state of contact with the mounting panel B-7. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means B-8, it is possible to position the light emitting boards of the hold display means and the sub display means by the mounting panel. Therefore, the light-emitting means of the hold display means and the light-emitting means of the sub-display means can be installed on the same plane without displacement. Can be hardly distinguished.

  Further, the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the holding display means and the light emitting substrate of the sub display means and the surface of the light emitting substrate can be hidden by the mounting panel. Can be difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the light emitting means of the hold display means and the light emitting means of the sub-display means, and to improve the design and the convenience.

  Means B-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein at least one of the hold display means and the sub-display means is configured to be displaceable.

  According to the means B-9, it is possible to completely change the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the hold display means and the display mode of the sub-display means, recognize the display mode of the hold display means, and display the final display. Can be more difficult to grasp.

Means B-10. In the game area, provided with a distance that allows a game ball to pass between the game board and the game board, provided with a start covering means for covering at least a front of the start ball input means,
A pseudo prize detecting means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covering area is provided in a covering area of which the front is covered by the starting covering means in the game area,
The means B-1 to B-9 are configured to be able to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the starting ball detecting means were detected based on the detection of the pseudo winning detecting means. A gaming machine according to any of the above.

  According to the means B-10, a pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the starting ball entry means in the covering area where the front is covered by the starting covering means. In other words, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the starting ball entry means is relatively reduced by the provision of the starting coating means, the starting coating is performed based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. It derives a pseudo prize winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the covered area on the back side of the means may have entered the starting ball entry means (for example, a pseudo prize detecting means installed in the covered area like the starting ball entry means). Based on the detection of, the same reaction as when the starting ball detection means is detected is derived, or when derived, it indicates that the reaction is due to the detection of the starting ball detection means. Etc.) can be performed. Therefore, as an action of the game ball with respect to the starting ball entry means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern of "may have entered" can be added. In addition, the number of types of effects can be increased, and the effects can be diversified. As a result, the value of the provision of the starting covering means to make it difficult to determine whether the game ball enters the starting ball entry means or not (the effect of whether the game ball entered the starting ball entry means) is dramatically increased. It is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, by providing a configuration that makes it difficult to instantaneously grasp the display mode of the hold display means as in the means B-1, even if the pseudo winning mode is derived, if the hold display means is visually recognized, In such a case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is instantaneously grasped that the number of pending storages has not increased (that is, a pseudo winning mode).

  In addition, the number of the starting ball entry means may be one or more. In addition, "the starting cover means may be attached to the game board". Examples of the pseudo prize mode include a display mode on a predetermined display unit, a voice mode by a voice output unit, a light-emitting mode by a predetermined light-emitting unit, and a combination thereof.

  C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as that a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball-in means provided on the game board or not to generate a hit state. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, in many cases, there is provided an effect display means which is performed following the variable display performed by the main display means and performs a variable display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, see JP-A-2006-271480. In the effect display means, even at the timing when the result of the lottery is taught by the main display means, the teaching of the result of the lottery may be postponed only by roughly suggesting the result of the lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the production, add inflections and the like by the game, and improve the production performance and the game performance.

  By the way, in some cases, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by knowing the result of the lottery first. In this case, a game in which the player is grasping the display mode of the main display means and playing the game while visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, enjoying an effect in the effect display means (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired). There is a concern that it will be attached.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game between a player who visually recognizes a main display means and a player who does not visually recognize a main display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a difference in gaming results.

Means C-1. Main control means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the winning / rejecting lottery;
A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
A main display unit that is directly controlled by the main control unit and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the winning / wrong lottery;
Direct display by the sub-control means, or is controlled indirectly, comprising a sub-display means for performing a pseudo display in which the start and end timing is synchronized with the confirmed display of the main display means,
The sub-display unit is arranged alongside the main display unit, and includes a display unit similar to a display unit for performing the final display of the main display unit,
A first composite mode in which a first mode of the final display of the main display unit that teaches a first result in the success / failure lottery and a mode of the pseudo display of the sub display unit;
A second aspect different from the first aspect of the confirmed display of the main display means for teaching a second result different from the first result in the success / failure lottery, and a mode of the pseudo display of the sub-display means And the second combined mode in which the same is displayed (the displayed position is different, but the shape is the same).
A gaming machine characterized in that the pseudo display mode of the sub display unit can be derived.

  According to the means C-1, pseudo display synchronized with the final display of the main display means (not related to the result of the winning / rejection lottery) is performed on the sub display means arranged alongside the main display means, and the sub display means is Since the display unit includes the same display unit as the main display unit, the pseudo display has a display mode similar to the final display. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main display unit and the sub-display unit is the display mode of the main display unit, and it is also difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display unit. Harder). Therefore, for example, while visually confirming the final display (contents taught by) of the main display unit, the player trying to play an efficient game based on such information and the final display of the main display unit are grasped. Differences in game results between a player who does not play, or a player who does not want to visually recognize the main display means because he wants to enjoy another effect performed in parallel with the confirmation display (for example, a game to be finally obtained) Value difference) can be minimized. In other words, a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the main display means relatively loses money is saved by a player who immediately plays the game in correspondence with the display mode of the main display means. be able to. As a result, it is possible to grasp the pattern of the final display of the main display means and to suppress the consciousness of losing the display if the main display means is not visually recognized, and to produce another effect performed in parallel with the final display. You can fully enjoy.

  Further, in order to make the final display of the main display means difficult to understand, the pseudo display is performed by the sub display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make the finalized display of the main display unit difficult to understand, the control load of the main control unit can be reduced or the main display unit can be simplified as compared with a case where the finalized display of the main display unit is made more complicated. Can be planned.

  Further, according to the means C-1, by appropriately changing the pseudo display mode of the sub-display means, for example, the first display mode of the main display means for teaching the first result in the success / failure lottery, A first composite mode in which the pseudo display mode of the display unit is combined, a second mode of the final display of the main display unit that teaches a second result different from the first result in the success / absence lottery, and a sub display The second composite mode in which the pseudo-display mode of the means is combined is configured to have the same display mode (the displayed position is different, but the shape is the same). Specifically, for example, three identical segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as a first sub-display unit, a main display unit, and a second sub-display unit from the left. Then, "1" (first mode) is displayed on the main display means, "3" is displayed on the second sub-display means, and the first sub-display means is completely turned off, and " "1", "3" (first mode) is displayed on the main display means, and "13" (first composite mode, second The same number is displayed. As described above, although the display (teaching contents) of the main display unit is different, when combined with the display of the sub-display unit, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as a whole, thereby making the final display of the main display unit difficult to understand. The above operation and effect are more reliably achieved.

  When the game machine is embodied as a pachinko machine, for example, "the first special game state is provided as the first result, the second special game state is provided as the second result, and the first special game state is provided. In the special game state and the second special game state, the number of rounds and the end condition of each round are the same (directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, the first result, The same is true of the effect display by the effect display means for effect display for suggesting the second result), but the game mode provided after the end of the special game state is different, the first composite mode And the second composite mode are derived (different from the first mode and the second mode, but combining the pseudo display to make the overall composite mode the same display mode). Good. In the case of, the only way to grasp in advance the game mode given after the end of the special game state is to grasp the first mode and the second mode. By making it difficult to comprehend, it is possible to postpone the timing at which the already determined content is taught as much as possible, and to achieve more effective effects such as deriving various effects during that time. .

  Note that “the first composite mode and the second composite mode have the same display mode” means that the composite mode is a combination of the final display mode of the main display unit and the pseudo display mode of the sub-display unit. This is to the effect that the same shape can be displayed at different positions.

  Means C-2. The display device further includes a cover unit that can be displaced between a cover position that covers a part of the display unit of the sub-display unit and an exposure position that exposes the part of the display unit of the sub-display unit. A gaming machine according to the means C-1.

  According to the means C-2, the visible range of the sub-display means that can be visually recognized is changed by the displacement of the covering means, and the entire display composed of the display mode of the main display means and the display mode of the sub-display means. The embodiment can be completely changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main display unit and to grasp the final display.

  It is desirable that the display portion of the main display means is configured so as not to be covered by the covering means. Further, it is also possible to provide "the coating driving means for driving the coating means, and the coating driving means is driven and controlled by the sub-control means". In this case, the display mode of the sub-display unit and the driving state of the coating driving unit can be surely matched while reducing the control burden on the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit controls the coating driving unit. it can. In addition, in the first composite mode or the second composite mode, it is possible to configure so that the entire sub-display means is covered by the covering means.

Means C-3. The first composite aspect is configured to be able to be derived without using a display unit covered by the covering unit among the sub-display units, when the covering unit is at the covering position,
In the second combined aspect, when the covering unit is at the exposure position, a display unit installed in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering unit at the covering position among the sub-display units is used. The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to be derived.

Means C-4. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of a display portion of the sub-display means, and a second covering capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub-display means different from the first covering means. Means,
The first composite mode is a display mode of the sub-display unit that is visible when the first coating unit is at the coating position and the second coating unit is at the exposure position, and the main display And a display mode of the means.
The second composite mode is a display mode of the sub-display unit that is visible when the first coating unit is at the exposure position and the second coating unit is at the coating position, and the main display The gaming machine according to the means C-2 or C-3, wherein the gaming machine is configured by a display mode of the means.

  According to the means C-3 and the means C-4, the unused area can be hidden by the covering means. For example, the display position of the composite mode combined with the fixed display of the main display means and the pseudo display of the sub-display means The relative positional relationship with the position of the covering means is different (the first composite aspect is displayed at a position close to the covering means, while the second composite aspect is displayed at a position far from the covering means, Alternatively, among the sub-display means, the area which is supposed to be used in the second composite mode is not being used, so that the first composite mode and the second composite mode are not displayed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is easy to grasp which of the combined modes is.

  As specific examples of the means C-3 and C-4, three identical segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as a first sub-display means, a main display means, and a second sub-display means from the left. In addition, a first covering means capable of covering the first sub-display means and a second covering means capable of covering the second sub-display means are provided. When the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposed position, "1" is displayed on the main display means, and "3" is displayed on the second sub-display means. And when the first covering means is at the exposure position and the second covering means is at the covering position, "1" is displayed on the first sub-display means, and "3" is displayed on the main display means. In both cases, the same number "13" is displayed.

  The number of covering means having the same relationship as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means C-4 is not particularly limited. For example, covering means are provided on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the main display means. It may be provided. Further, the first coating means and the second coating means are not limited to those constituted by one plate, respectively. It may be configured so as to be operable.

  Means C-5. In a first display state in which the first composite mode is derived and in a second display state in which the second composite mode is derived, the main display unit and the display unit of the sub display unit are visually recognized. The gaming machine according to means C-4, wherein said covering means is configured to be displaceable so that the sum of possible areas is the same or substantially the same.

  According to the means C-5, for example, when the first covering means and the second covering means operate in synchronization (moving the same distance in the same direction), the first covering state and the second covering state are determined. However, the area obtained by adding the area of the display unit of the main display unit and the area of the display unit of the sub display unit, which can be visually recognized by the player, can be made (almost) the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the main display unit and the sub display unit needs to be changed from the difference in the area.

Means C-6. The main control means is configured to be able to output information on the final display of the main display means to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means determines the pseudo display of the sub-display means based on information on the confirmed display of the main display means, wherein the pseudo-display is determined by the sub-display means. Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-6, with respect to the composite display in which the confirmed display of the main display means and the pseudo display of the sub-display means are combined, a composite display having a different display position but the same display mode is derived. It is possible to increase the possibility of deriving such a phenomenon not by accident but by aiming (in a pinpoint) or by (by limiting the pattern to be associated to some extent). Therefore, the operation and effect of making the confirmed display pattern of the main display means more difficult to understand can be more reliably achieved, and the display mode of the sub display module is more effectively combined with the display mode of the main display module. And the like can be improved.

  Means C-7. The main display unit and the sub-display unit each include a light-emitting substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting units are mounted, and the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub-display unit include the plurality of light-emitting substrates. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-6, characterized by being constituted by means.

  According to the means C-7, simplification of control and the like is achieved as compared with the case where the main display means and the sub-display means are constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the design is reduced as compared with the case where the main display means and the sub-display means are constituted by a segment display device. The degree of freedom is improved. Note that "the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means may be arranged in a matrix as a whole". In this case, the design effect is improved, and the effect of making the boundary between the main display means and the sub-display means difficult to see is further enhanced.

Means C-8. The main display means, and a display panel side of the sub-display means is provided with a mounting panel formed with an insertion hole capable of individually inserting the light-emitting means of the main display means and the sub-display means,
The main display unit and the sub-display unit may be configured such that the light-emitting unit is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light-emitting substrate is fixed to the mounting panel in a contact state. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means C-8, the light emitting boards of the main display means and the sub display means can be positioned by the mounting panel. Therefore, the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub-display means can be installed on the same plane without displacement. Can be hardly distinguished.

  Further, the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the main display unit and the light emitting substrate of the sub display unit and the surface of the light emitting substrate can be hidden by the mounting panel. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the light emitting unit of the main display unit from the light emitting unit of the sub display unit, and to improve the design and the convenience.

Means C-9. The plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit are arranged in a matrix,
The plurality of light emitting means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix with the light emitting means of the main display means so as to follow the matrix of the light emitting means of the main display means,
The confirmed display performs a variable display by changing a position or a combination of the light emitting units to be lit among the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit, and after a specified time, the main display unit A plurality of the light emitting means are configured to be lit in a combination corresponding to the result of the lottery,
During the variable display of the main display unit, the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit and the sub display unit are regular in the entire arrangement of the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit and the sub display unit. The gaming machine according to the means C-7 or C-8, wherein lighting and extinguishing are repeated.

  For example, when the plurality of light emitting units of the main display unit arranged in a matrix are turned on in a regular order, the arrangement of the light emitting units of the main display unit is interrupted. In the case where are arranged, by turning on the light emitting means of the sub-display means, the regular lighting mode can be applied to the entire main display means and sub-display means. Therefore, the appearance of the variable display of the main display means can be improved (natural), and the separation between the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means can be made difficult to understand. At the time of stop, the above-mentioned operation and effect of making the final display of the main display means difficult to understand can be more reliably achieved.

  Means C-10. During the variable display of the main display unit, in a state where at least one of the light emitting units of the main display unit and the sub display unit is turned on, at least one of the light emitting units of the main display unit is turned on. The gaming machine according to means C-9, wherein:

  According to the means C-10, it is possible to reliably indicate that the main display means is performing variable display.

Means C-11. Direction display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and teaches the result of the success / failure lottery, or effect display for indicating is performed,
An operation (directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control unit, adjacent to at least one of the main display unit and the sub-display unit, corresponding to (interlocked with) the effect display of the effect display unit ( The gaming machine according to any of means C-1 to C-10, further comprising a decoration (display) means for performing decoration display.

  According to the means C-11, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the main display means, and even when the peripheral part of the main display means is visually recognized, a fancy effect display is performed by the effect display means. And the like, it becomes easier for the user to pay more attention to the operation of the decoration means corresponding to the effect display. Therefore, the above-mentioned operation and effect of making the final display of the main display means difficult to understand can be further achieved.

  In addition, corresponding to the means C-5, "the main display means in the first display state in which the first combined mode is derived and the second display state in which the second combined mode is derived." And, by displacing the covering means so that the sum of the visible areas of the display portions of the sub-display means is the same or substantially the same, the visible areas of the decorative means are the same or almost the same. Be the same. " In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is easy to recognize which of the first display state and the second display state is due to a change in the visual recognition mode of the decoration means.

  In addition, "the decoration means is decoration display means for performing decoration display corresponding to the effect display, and the decoration display means has the same display unit as the display unit of the main display unit and the sub display unit. That ". Further, as the decoration means, instead of or in addition to the decoration display means, "directly or indirectly by the sub-control means adjacent to at least one of the main display means and the sub-display means. A movable decoration means that is controlled and performs an operation corresponding (linked) to the effect display of the effect display means ”.

  D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as that a game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting ball-in means provided on the game board or not to generate a hit state. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, in many cases, there is provided an effect display means which is performed following the variable display performed by the main display means and performs a variable display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, see JP-A-2006-271480. In the effect display means, even at the timing when the result of the lottery is taught by the main display means, the teaching of the result of the lottery may be postponed only by roughly suggesting the result of the lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the production, add inflections and the like by the game, and improve the production performance and the game performance.

  By the way, in some cases, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by knowing the result of the lottery first. In this case, a game in which the player is grasping the display mode of the main display means and playing the game while visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, enjoying an effect in the effect display means (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired). There is a concern that it will be attached.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game between a player who visually recognizes a main display means and a player who does not visually recognize a main display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a difference in gaming results.

Means D-1. Main control means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the winning / rejecting lottery;
A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
A main display unit that is directly controlled by the main control unit and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the winning / wrong lottery;
Direction display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and teaches the result of the success / failure lottery, or effect display for indicating is performed,
A gaming machine comprising: an irradiating unit capable of irradiating the main display unit with light.

  According to the means D-1, by irradiating the light of the irradiating means to the area including the boundary between the part constituting the definite display and the peripheral part of the main display means, the contrast between the two is as little as possible. By illuminating (shading) or irradiating the light of the irradiating means with a part of the main display means which can constitute a definite display, it is determined whether or not the corresponding part currently constitutes a definite display (what is displayed. Is displayed or nothing is displayed). For this reason, it is possible to make the pattern of the final display of the main display means difficult to understand (it is difficult to make an instantaneous determination). Therefore, for example, while visually confirming the final display (contents taught by) of the main display unit, the player trying to play an efficient game based on such information and the final display of the main display unit are grasped. Differences in game results with players who do not want to view the main display means, or players who do not want to visually recognize the main display means (for example, Difference) can be minimized. In other words, a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the main display means relatively loses money is saved by a player who immediately plays the game in correspondence with the display mode of the main display means. be able to. As a result, it is possible to grasp the final display pattern of the main display means and to suppress the consciousness of losing the display if the main display means is not visually recognized. You can enjoy it.

Means D-2. In a configuration in which the main display unit includes a plurality of light-emitting units and the plurality of light-emitting units perform the final display,
The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein a material having a higher reflectance than the light emitting means is used for a peripheral portion of the light emitting means.

  According to the means D-2, by irradiating the light of the irradiating means, the boundary between the portion constituting the confirmed display and the peripheral portion thereof in the confirmed display of the main display means is as blurred as possible. The operation and effect of performing the operation are further enhanced.

Means D-3. The main display unit includes a plurality of light-emitting units, and the plurality of light-emitting units perform the confirmed display,
In a configuration in which the irradiation unit irradiates light toward the light emitting unit from an oblique front of the light emitting unit,
The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein a peripheral portion of the light emitting means is inclined toward the irradiation means.

  According to the means D-3, the light emitted from the oblique front irradiated by the irradiation means can be efficiently reflected forward.

Means D-4. The main display unit includes a light-emitting substrate on which the plurality of light-emitting units are mounted, and a display unit of the main display unit includes the plurality of light-emitting units;
On the display unit side of the main display unit, a mounting panel provided with an insertion hole into which each of the light emitting units of the main display unit can be individually inserted is provided,
The main display unit may be configured such that the light emitting unit is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light emitting substrate is fixed to the mounting panel in a contact state. The described gaming machine.

  According to the means D-4, the difference in position between the front end of the light emitting means and the peripheral part of the light emitting means in the front-back direction can be minimized, and the boundary between the light emitting means and the peripheral part of the light emitting means can be reduced. The above-mentioned effects such as making it difficult to understand are more effectively achieved. Further, since the peripheral portion of the light emitting means (the front end portion) is a mounting panel, processing of the peripheral portion of the light emitting means (such as increasing the reflectivity or forming a concave shape as described above) is relatively performed. It can be done freely and easily.

  Further, control simplification and the like are achieved as compared with the case where the main display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the degree of freedom of design is improved as compared with the case where the main display means is constituted by a segment display device. Further, for example, when a plurality of light-emitting substrates are arranged at relatively close positions (the main display means may have a plurality of light-emitting substrates, or the main display means may have a plurality of light-emitting substrates, and the main display means may have a different light-emitting substrate. And a plurality of light-emitting boards can be positioned by attaching them together and mounting the mounting panel. Therefore, a plurality of light emitting means can be installed on the same plane without displacement. In addition, the boundary between the plurality of light emitting substrates and the surface of the light emitting substrate can be hidden by the mounting panel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the design and the convenience.

  Means D-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, wherein the irradiating means changes its mode before and after the end timing of the final display.

  According to the means D-5, by irradiating the light more strongly from the irradiating means at the end timing of the finalized display, the above-mentioned operation and effect of making it difficult to grasp the finalized display of the main display means is further achieved. Become.

  The irradiating means may be configured to switch from the unlit state to the lit state before or after the end of the finalized display, for example. It may be configured so that the object is turned off and the lighted one remains on), and after the end, the lighting and the turning off are changed rapidly. Furthermore, for example, the display may be configured to display various colors after the end of the fixed display, while the display is the single white color before the end of the finalized display.

Means D-6. Directly by the sub-control means, or controlled indirectly, comprising a sub-display means for performing a pseudo display in which the start and end timing is synchronized with the final display of the main display means,
The sub-display unit is arranged alongside the main display unit, and includes a display unit similar to a display unit for performing the final display of the main display unit,
The device according to any one of means D-1 to D-5, wherein the irradiating unit is configured to irradiate light to a portion between the main display unit and the sub-display unit. Gaming machine.

  According to the means D-6, the sub-display means arranged adjacent to the main display means performs a pseudo display synchronized with the final display of the main display means (not related to the result of the success / absence lottery), and the sub-display means is the main display means. Since the display unit includes the same display unit as the display unit, the pseudo display has a display mode similar to the final display. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main display unit and the sub-display unit is the display mode of the main display unit, and it is also difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display unit. Harder). Therefore, the above-described operation and effect can be further achieved by grasping the confirmed display pattern of the main display means and suppressing the consciousness that the main display means will be damaged unless the main display means is visually recognized.

  Further, in order to make the final display of the main display means difficult to understand, the pseudo display is performed by the sub display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make the finalized display of the main display unit difficult to understand, the control load of the main control unit can be reduced or the main display unit can be simplified as compared with a case where the finalized display of the main display unit is made more complicated. Can be planned.

  Further, by irradiating the portion between the main display means and the sub-display means with light, it becomes difficult to recognize where the boundary between the main display means and the sub-display means is located. It becomes difficult to recognize the confirmed display pattern. As a result, the effect of grasping the final display pattern of the main display means and suppressing the consciousness that the main display means is damaged unless the main display means is visually recognized is further enhanced.

  Note that "the irradiation means may be controlled by the sub-control means". In this case, the display mode of the sub-display unit and the irradiation state of the irradiation unit can be surely matched while reducing the control burden of the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit controls the irradiation unit. Further, it is configured such that the main control means can output information on the confirmed display of the main display means to the sub control means, and the sub control means is configured to output information based on the confirmed display of the main display means. Then, the pseudo display of the sub-display unit and the irradiation mode of the irradiation unit are determined. " In this case, the display mode of the sub display unit and the irradiation mode of the irradiation unit can be matched with the display mode of the main display unit. Therefore, the display mode of the sub-display unit, and the irradiation mode of the irradiation unit, more effectively combined with the display mode of the main display unit, to derive a more apparent display, the stop mode of the sub-display unit, In combination with the stop mode of the main display means, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived.

Means D-7. A covering position that covers a part of the display unit of the sub-display unit and a covering unit that can be displaced between an exposure position that exposes the part of the display unit of the sub-display unit,
The gaming machine according to means D-6, wherein the irradiating means is attached to a back side of the covering means and is configured to be displaceable together with the covering means.

  According to the means D-7, the visible range of the sub-display means is changed by the displacement of the covering means, and the entire display constituted by the display mode of the main display means and the display mode of the sub-display means. The embodiment can be completely changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main display unit and to grasp the final display.

  Further, since the irradiating means is attached to the back side of the covering means, it is possible to prevent a displacement between the position of the covering means and the irradiation mode by the irradiating means. For this reason, for example, when the same display mode of the composite display including the final display of the main display unit and the pseudo display of the sub-display unit can be derived at different display positions, the display position is: In order to make it difficult to see the difference between the first position and the second position, a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of covering means are used to cover an unused area of the display section of the sub-display means. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the composite display is irradiated with light at the first position, but the composite display is not irradiated with light at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which it is easily estimated that the covering means has been displaced by the mode of light of the irradiation means, and the pattern of the final display of the main display means is easily recognized. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the irradiating means itself is directly visually recognized, thereby causing a decrease in designability and the like.

  It should be noted that "the coating driving means for driving the coating means is provided, and the driving of the coating driving means is controlled by the sub-control means". In this case, the display mode of the sub-display unit and the driving state of the coating driving unit can be surely matched while reducing the control burden on the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit controls the coating driving unit. it can. Also, "the covering means can cover a part of the display unit of the sub-display means, and the first covering means can cover a part of the display unit of the sub-display means different from the first covering means." A main display unit and the sub display unit, wherein the main display unit and the sub display unit are visible when the first coating unit is at the coating position and the second coating unit is at the exposure position. The same display mode as the display mode of the sub display mode and the display mode of the main display mode is the same as the display mode, wherein the first coating mode is at the exposure position, and the second coating mode is at the coating position. , The display mode of the sub-display unit and the display mode of the main display unit, which can be visually recognized, can be derived. "

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above-described units are applied will be described below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example of the mode, "the operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, the firing means (firing motor or the like) for playing the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, Ball game machine having a game area in which a game ball is guided, and each ball entry means (general prize apparatus, variable prize apparatus, start prize apparatus, etc.) disposed in the game area.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine provided with a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the mode, "the operating means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, the firing means (firing motor or the like) for playing the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, The game ball is guided and extends in a substantially vertical direction. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface or the like) and each ball entry means (general prize device, A variable prize device, a start prize device, etc.), and the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball-ball gaming machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example of the mode, "variable display (specifically, reels, belts, and other rotating bodies with symbols) of identification information strings (symbol strings; specifically, reels or belts with symbols) composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information (symbols) And the like, and a variable display unit (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation of the start operation unit (specifically, the start lever). The change of the identification information (symbol) is started, and the change of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A turning-type gaming machine configured to provide a gaming value on condition that the information is specific identification information. "

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined (especially a gaming machine of a slot machine specification using a game ball as a game medium). As a more detailed embodiment, "variable display (specifically, a reel such as a reel or a belt provided with a symbol) of an identification information sequence (a symbol sequence; specifically, a reel with a symbol attached thereto) comprising a plurality of pieces of identification information (a symbol) is performed. And the like, and a variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation of the start operation means (specifically, a start lever). The change of the identification information (symbol) is started, and the change of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A game value is provided on condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball tray (upper plate or the like) is further provided to take in game balls from the ball tray. Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  Reference numeral 10: pachinko machine, 32a: first variable winning device, 32b: second variable winning device, 33a: first starting winning device, 33b: second starting winning device, 34: through gate, 42: decorative design display device, 43a ... 1st special display device, 43b ... 2nd special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub-control device.

Claims (1)

Main control means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and generating the special gaming state based on a result of the winning / rejecting lottery;
A sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
A main display unit that is directly controlled by the main control unit and performs a definite display for teaching the result of the winning / wrong lottery;
Direction display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and teaches the result of the success / failure lottery, or effect display for indicating is performed,
A gaming machine comprising: an irradiating unit capable of irradiating the main display unit with light.

Images